TWI227338B - Projection type display - Google Patents

Abstract

The projection type display of the present invention comprises: a light source 1, a display panel 8 having a plurality of pixel regions for modulating the light emitted from the light source 1, light control means 4-6 for guiding the light onto the corresponding pixel regions in accordance with the light wavelength, and an optical system 9, 11 for forming images on a screen 13 using the light modulated in the display panel. The display comprises a circuit for driving the display panel 8 to display a plurality of sub-flame images time-sequentially. The circuit forms data of the sub-flame images from data of each of the flame image that constitutes images to be displayed. The display further comprises an image shifter 11 for shifting selected ones of the sub-flame images on the screen. The different wavelength light modulated by the different pixel regions of the display panel 8 is incident upon the same region of the screen 13 sequentially. The display can form a blight and high-resolution image, and is suitable for reduction in size and cost.

Description

1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（1 技術領域 本發明係有關圖像顯示裝置，尤其是有關可以不使用彩 色濾光器，而使用一塊圖像顯示面板實施彩色顯示的單板 式投影型圖像顯示裝置。本發明適用於小型之投影型彩色 液晶電視系統及資訊顯示系統上。 背景技術 以下説明使用液晶顯示面板之先前投影型圖像顯示裝 置。 此種投影型圖像顯示裝置，因液晶顯示面板本身不發 光，因此需要另外設計光源，不過與使用CRT之投影型圖 像顯示裝置比較時，具有色彩重現範圍廣、小型、輕量、 不需要收斂調整等極爲優異的特徵。 以使用液晶顯示面板之投影型圖像顯示裝置進行全色彩 頭TF時’因應二原色，有使用二塊液晶顯示面板的三板式 及僅使用一塊的單板式。 三板式投影型圖像顯示裝置使用，將白色光分別分割成 紅（R)、綠（G)及藍（B)三原色的光學系統，及將r，〇及b色 的光線分別調變形成圖像的3塊液晶顯示面板，藉由將R， G及B色的各個圖像做光學性重疊，以達到全色彩顯示。 三板式投影型圖像顯示裝置雖可有效利用自白色光源所 射出的光線’然而因光學系統複雜，且組件數量多，因此 從成本及尺寸的觀點，較劣於單板式的投影型圖像顯示裝 置。 單板式投影型圖像顯示裝置使用一塊具備排列成馬赛克 -4- 本紙張尺度適用中g @家標準(CNS) A4規格(21Qχ297公着巧—--一 1227338 A7 ____________________ 五、發明説明（2 ) 狀或、毒條狀之二原色彩色滤光器的液晶顯示面板。因而以 液晶顯示面板所顯示之全色彩圖像藉由投影光學系統投影 在勞幕等被投影面上。此種單板式投影型圖像顯示裝置如 特開昭59-230383號公報所揭示。採用單板式時，由於使 用一塊液晶顯示面板，因此光學系統的構造也比三板式單 純，適於以低成本提供小型的投影型圖像顯示裝置。 但是’使用彩色濾光器的單板式時，會發生彩色濾光器 吸收光線，以致與使用同等光源之三板式比較，圖像亮度 約減低1 / 3。此外，又因對應於液晶顯示面板之r，〇，b的 二個像素區域需要構成一組，進行一個像素的顯示，所以 圖像的解像度也減低至三板式之解像度的w 3。 雖然提高光源亮度是一種解決亮度減低的方法，不過在 民生上使用時，多不願意使用耗電大的光源。此外，使用 吸收型的彩色濾光器時，因被彩色濾光器所吸收的光能轉 變成熱，徒然增加光源亮度，不僅引起液晶顯示面板溫度 上升’且加速彩色遽光器的褪色。因此，如何有效利用所 提供之光線，是提高投影型圖像顯示裝置利用價値上的重 要課題。 爲使單板式投影型圖像顯示裝置的圖像亮度提高，而開 發有一種無彩色濾光器之進行全色彩顯示的液晶顯示裝置 (特開平4-6053 8號公報）。該液晶顯示裝置藉由分色鏡等電 介質反射鏡將自光源射出的白色歩分割成R，G，b三種光 束，並使其以不同的角度射入配置在液晶顯示面板光源端 的微型透鏡陣列。射入微型透鏡的各光束藉由穿透微型透 -5- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) I227338 A7 ^一 —___ B7 五、説明 h ) '~———- 鏡，因應射入角在對應之像素區域聚光。因而，被分離之 R，G，B各光束在各個像素區域被調變，用於全色彩顯 TJT 〇 特開平5-2493 18號公報中揭示有一種使用對應於r，g， B光線之穿透型的全息元件，來取代上述電介質反射鏡， 以提高光利用率的顯示裝置，另外在特開平卜222361號公 報揭示有一種使穿透型全息元件具備對應於像素間隙的週 期性構造，以提供電介質反射鏡及微型透鏡功能的裝置。 有關單板是另一項課題的解像度，可藉由採用場序制， 在一塊液晶顯示面板上獲得與三板式同樣的解像度。場序 制係藉由以人體視覺無法分離的速度進行光源色彩的切 換’利用分時顯示之各圖像顏色由加色法混合構成影像 (&績加色法混合）。 以場序制進行全色彩顯示的投影型圖像顯示裝置具有如 圖76所示的構造。該顯示裝置係配合液晶顯示面板之垂直 掃瞄週期，使由R，G，B彩色濾光器所構成的圓盤高速旋 轉’將對應於彩色濾光器之顏色的圖像信號依序輸入液晶 顯示面板的驅動電路。人體眼睛可辨識出對各種顏色的圖 像合成影像。 採用此種場序制的顯示裝置時，與單板方式不同，液晶 顯示面板的各像素因係以分時顯示r，G，B圖像，因而其 解像度達到與三板式同樣的水準。_ 場序制的其他顯示裝置，如IDW’ 99 (P989〜P992)中所揭 示之以R ’ G，B各個光束照射液晶顯示面板之不同區域的 -6- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（4 ) 投影型圖像顯示裝置。該顯示裝置係藉由電介質反射鏡將 自光源放射之白色光分離成R，G，B的光束，再以r，g， B的各個光束照射液晶顯示面板的不同區域。r，G，b光 線對液晶顯示面板的照射位置藉由使立體狀的棱鏡旋轉來 依次切換。 此外，特開平9-2 14997號公報中所揭示之投影型圖像顯 示裝置係使用與上述特開平4-60538號公報所揭示之液晶 顯示裝置相同的J夜晶顯示裝置，以同樣的方法將白色光分 割成各色光束，以不同角度，使各光束射入像素區域内。 由於泫投影型圖像顯示裝置同時兼顧提高光使用效率及高 解像度，因此將各幀圖像分時成數個子幀圖像，與液晶顯 tf面板之垂直掃瞄週期同步，週期性切換光束的射入角 但是，採用上述特開平心60538號公報、特開平5_249318 #公赧、及特問旱缺a & e ^1227338 A7 B7 V. DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION (1) TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to an image display device, and more particularly to a single-plate projection image display device that can perform color display without using a color filter and using an image display panel. The present invention is applicable to a small-sized projection-type color liquid crystal television system and an information display system. BACKGROUND ART The following describes a conventional projection-type image display device using a liquid crystal display panel. Such a projection-type image display device is based on the liquid crystal display panel itself. It does not emit light, so it is necessary to design a separate light source, but compared with a projection type image display device using a CRT, it has extremely excellent characteristics such as wide color reproduction range, small size, light weight, and no need for convergence adjustment. To use a liquid crystal display panel When a full-color head TF is used in a projection-type image display device, there are a three-plate type using two liquid crystal display panels and a single-plate type using only one in response to the two primary colors. The three-plate projection image display device uses white light separately. Optical system divided into three primary colors of red (R), green (G) and blue (B), and r Three liquid crystal display panels of 〇 and b colors are respectively modulated to form an image, and the respective images of R, G, and B colors are optically overlapped to achieve full color display. Three-plate projection image display Although the device can effectively use the light emitted from the white light source, 'because the optical system is complicated and the number of components is large, it is inferior to the single-plate projection image display device from the viewpoint of cost and size. The image display device uses a piece with a mosaic arrangement -4- This paper is applicable in g @ 家 standard (CNS) A4 specification (21Qχ297 public publication Qiao-a 1227338 A7 ____________________ 5. Description of the invention (2) The liquid crystal display panel of the second primary color filter. Therefore, the full-color image displayed by the liquid crystal display panel is projected on a projection surface such as a curtain by a projection optical system. This single-plate projection image display device As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 59-230383, when a single-plate type is used, the structure of the optical system is simpler than that of a three-plate type because a single liquid crystal display panel is used, which is suitable for low-cost applications. This is a compact projection-type image display device. However, when using the single-plate type with color filters, the color filter absorbs light, so that the brightness of the image is reduced by about 1/3 compared with the three-plate type using the same light source. In addition, because the two pixel areas corresponding to r, 0, and b of the liquid crystal display panel need to form a group to display one pixel, the resolution of the image is also reduced to w 3 of the three-plate resolution. The brightness of the light source is a method to reduce the brightness, but when it is used in people's livelihood, it is often unwilling to use a light source that consumes a lot of power. In addition, when using an absorption-type color filter, the light energy absorbed by the color filter is used Turning into heat will increase the brightness of the light source in vain, which will not only cause the temperature of the LCD panel to rise, but also accelerate the fading of the color calender. Therefore, how to effectively use the light provided is an important issue in increasing the utilization cost of a projection type image display device. In order to improve the brightness of a single-plate projection type image display device, a liquid crystal display device having a full-color display without a color filter has been developed (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 4-6053 8). This liquid crystal display device uses a dielectric reflector, such as a dichroic mirror, to divide the white light emitted from the light source into three light beams of R, G, and b, and makes it enter a micro lens array arranged at the light source end of the liquid crystal display panel at different angles. Each light beam that enters the micro lens is transmitted through the micro lens. -5- This paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) I227338 A7 ^ 一 —___ B7 V. Explanation h) '~ — ——- Mirror, according to the incident angle, condenses light in the corresponding pixel area. Therefore, the separated R, G, and B light beams are modulated in each pixel region for full-color display TJT. JP-A-5-2493 No. 18 discloses a method of using light beams corresponding to r, g, and B rays. A transmissive holographic element is used in place of the above-mentioned dielectric mirror to improve the light utilization ratio. In addition, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 222361 discloses a transmission holographic element having a periodic structure corresponding to a pixel gap. Device that provides dielectric mirror and micro lens functions. The single board is another issue of resolution. By adopting the field sequential system, the same resolution as that of the three-plate type can be obtained on a liquid crystal display panel. The field sequence system is to switch the color of the light source at a speed that cannot be separated by human vision. The image colors are mixed by the additive method (& additive additive method) using time-sharing display of each image color. A projection-type image display device that performs full-color display in a field sequential system has a structure as shown in Fig. 76. The display device cooperates with the vertical scanning period of the liquid crystal display panel to rotate the disc composed of R, G, and B color filters at high speed, and sequentially input image signals corresponding to the colors of the color filters into the liquid crystal. Driving circuit of the display panel. The human eye can recognize a composite image of images of various colors. When such a field sequential display device is used, unlike the single-plate method, each pixel of the liquid crystal display panel displays r, G, and B images in a time-sharing manner, and thus its resolution reaches the same level as that of the three-plate type. _ Field display of other display devices, such as disclosed in IDW '99 (P989 ~ P992), each beam of R' G, B irradiates different areas of the liquid crystal display panel -6- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS ) A4 size (210X 297 mm) 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (4) Projection type image display device. The display device separates the white light emitted from the light source into R, G, and B light beams by using a dielectric reflector, and then irradiates different regions of the liquid crystal display panel with each of the r, g, and B light beams. The irradiation positions of the r, G, and b light rays on the liquid crystal display panel are sequentially switched by rotating a three-dimensional prism. In addition, the projection type image display device disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-2 14997 uses the same J-crystal display device as the liquid crystal display device disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 4-60538 described above. White light is divided into light beams of different colors, and each light beam is made to enter the pixel area at different angles. Since the 泫 projection type image display device simultaneously takes into account the improvement of light use efficiency and high resolution, each frame image is divided into several sub-frame images in a time-sharing manner, synchronized with the vertical scanning period of the liquid crystal display tf panel, and the emission of the light beam is switched periodically. Into the corner, however, the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application No. 60538, Japanese Patent Application No. 5_249318 # 公 赧, and special question a lack of a & e ^

R，G及B用的三個像素作爲一組來使用。The three pixels for R, G, and B are used as a group.

的問題。The problem.

明光。因此，光 的限制而 置相互重璺’目而需要平行度極爲優異的照 光的使用效率文到照明光之平行度的而Bright light. Therefore, the limitation of light places each other's attention on each other and requires the use efficiency of the light with extremely excellent parallelism.

1227338 A7 -------- B7 五、發明説明（5 ) 降低。 嶮上所述’上述之任何先前技術均無法同時解決屬於單 板式課題之亮度與解像度的問題。 、 本專利中請人在特開平9·214997號公報中揭示意圖解決 上述課題的投影型圖像顯示裝置。採用特開平9-214997號 公報所揭示的顯示裝置時，需要使光束對液晶面板的射入 角度與液晶面板之垂直掃瞄其週期同步依序切換。因該裝 置進行此種切換，所以在液晶顯示面板與光源之間須Ϊ持 特别的it間，因而需要驅動兩組全息元件及反射鏡。 由於此種顯示裝置進行射入光角度的切換，因此需要數 個移動部，造成其控制複雜。此外，由於液晶顯示面板之 各像素係依序顯示所有顏色，因而無法以液晶顯示面板進 行顏色調整。 有鑑於上述情況，本發明之主要目的在於提供一種投影 型圖像顯示裝置，可達到明亮、高解像度的均勻顯示，且 適用於小型化及低成本化。 發明之揭示 本發明之投影型圖像顯示裝置具備：光源；圖像顯示面 板’其具有可凋變各個光線的數個像素區域；光控制手 段，其係因應波段，使自上述光源射出之光線在上述數個 像素區域中之對應像素區域上聚光；及光學系統，其係藉 由上述圖像顯示面板所調變的光線在被投影面上形成圖 像，且具備：分時顯示電路，其係自構成圖像之各幀圖像 資料生成數個子幀圖像資料，以上述圖像顯示面板顯示上 -8- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐） 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（6 逑數個子巾貞㈣；及圖像移動元件，其係使上述圖像顯示 面板所顯示之上述數個子_像中選出之子巾貞圖像在上述 被投影面上移動，以屬於被上述圖像顯示面板之不同圖像 區域碉變之不同波段的光線依序照射上述被投影面上的同 一區域 ° 較佳之實施形態爲，使構成第n+1 (n爲正整數）幀圖像之 子幢圖像在上述被投影面上移動的方向，與使構成第_貞 圖像之子幀圖像在上述被投影面上移動的方向相同。 較佳之實施形態爲，使構成第n+1 (n爲正整數）帕圖像之 子賴圖像在上述被投影面上移動的方向，與使構成第以貞 圖像之子幀圖像在上述被投影面上移動的方向相反，第 n+u貞圖像第一個子幀圖像不對第„幢圖像之最後—個子傾 圖像移動。 ~ 車义佳之貫施开^怨爲，構成各幀圖像之子幀圖像的數量爲 2個，各子幀圖像在上述被投影面上不同的兩個位置2 = 序顯示。 較佳之貫施形怨爲，構成各幀圖像之子幀圖像的數量爲 2個，各子幀圖像在上述被投影面上不同的二彳 馬 调位置上依 序顯示，上述子幀圖像之移動週期爲幀期間的丨5件。 較佳之實施形態爲，構成各幀圖像之子幀圖像的數量爲 4個以上，各子幀圖像在上述被投影面上不同的三個 上依序顯示’構成各f貞圖像之4個-以上子巾貞圖像中 』 個子幀圖像顯示在上述被投影面上的同一位i。 較佳之實施形態爲，顯示在上述被投影面上间—上、 °】一置之 -9 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐)1227338 A7 -------- B7 Fifth, the description of the invention (5) is reduced. As stated above, 'any of the previous technologies mentioned above cannot simultaneously solve the problems of brightness and resolution which are single board issues. In this patent, a projection type image display device that solves the above-mentioned problems is disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9/214997. When the display device disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-214997 is used, the incident angle of the light beam to the liquid crystal panel and the period of the vertical scanning of the liquid crystal panel need to be sequentially switched in synchronization. Because the device performs such switching, a special IT room must be held between the liquid crystal display panel and the light source, and thus two sets of holographic elements and mirrors need to be driven. Since such a display device switches the angle of incident light, it requires several moving parts, making its control complicated. In addition, since each pixel of the liquid crystal display panel sequentially displays all colors, color adjustment cannot be performed with the liquid crystal display panel. In view of the foregoing, a main object of the present invention is to provide a projection-type image display device, which can achieve uniform and bright display with high resolution, and is suitable for miniaturization and low cost. DISCLOSURE OF THE INVENTION The projection type image display device of the present invention includes: a light source; an image display panel having a plurality of pixel regions capable of decaying each light; and a light control means for responding to a wavelength band to emit light from the light source. Condensing light on corresponding pixel areas of the above-mentioned several pixel areas; and an optical system, which forms an image on a projection surface by using light modulated by the image display panel, and includes: a time-sharing display circuit, It generates several sub-frame image data from the image data of each frame constituting the image, and displays it on the above image display panel. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (6) Several sub-frames; and an image moving element, which enables the sub-frame images selected from the sub-images displayed on the image display panel to be on the projected surface Move upward to sequentially illuminate the same region on the projected surface with light in different wavelength bands that are transformed by different image regions of the image display panel ° The preferred embodiment is to make The direction in which the child image forming the n + 1th (n is a positive integer) frame image moves on the projected surface is the same as the direction in which the child frame image constituting the _zhenth image moves on the projected surface. In a preferred embodiment, the direction in which the child image of the n + 1th (n is a positive integer) Pa image is moved on the projected surface and the image of the sub-frame that constitutes the first image is described above. The direction of movement on the projected surface is opposite, and the first sub-frame image of the n + uzhen image does not move to the last of the first image, the sub-tilt image. The number of sub-frame images of each frame image is two, and each sub-frame image is displayed at two different positions on the above-mentioned projected surface. 2 = sequential display. The best practice is to form the sub-frames of each frame image. The number of images is two, and each sub-frame image is displayed in sequence at different positions of the two horses on the projected surface, and the movement period of the sub-frame image is 5 pieces during the frame period. The form is that the number of sub-frame images constituting each frame image is 4 or more, and each sub-frame image is as described above. Three different frames on the projection plane are sequentially displayed, 'of the four or more sub-frame images constituting each f frame image', the sub-frame images are displayed at the same position i on the projected surface. A preferred embodiment In order to display on the above-mentioned projected surface—upper, °] one place of -9-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm)

裝Hold

五、發明説明（7 上述至少2個子t貞圖像包含顯示黑色的子悄圖像。 較佳之實施形態爲，顯示在上述被投影面上… 上述至少2個子幀圖像包本古卢 么置之 二、 蓼l σ冗度被減低的子幀圖像。 較佳之實施形態爲，在上述被投影面上㈣ 的移動圖案具有週期性，上诚浐叙 U子悄 ^ Γ上迷和動圖案的1週期至少勺人 兩次概略兩個像素間距的移動。 乂匕各 較佳（貫施形態爲，上述子幀丨週期的移動圖案由 個依序顯示之3個子t貞之移動所規定之6種子集合 的數個子集合所組成，上述6種子集合屬㈣動方向2 對稱關係之兩群中的任何一群。 ； 幸又佳之貫犯形怨爲，上述子幀丨週期的移動圖案交互包 含分別自上述兩群選出的子集合。 匕 較佳之實施形態爲，上述子幀丨週期的移動圖案由依序 顯示之18個子幀的移動所構成，並交互包含分別自上述兩 群選出之6個子集合。 較佳之實施形態爲，上述子幀丨週期的移動圖案由依序 顯示之6個子幀的移動所構成，並交互包含分別自上述兩 群逐一選出之2個子集合。 較佳之實施形態爲，上述被投影面上移動之上述子幀圖 像的移動圖案具有週期性，上述移動圖案包含使上述子情 圖像在同一直線上的4個不同位置上移動。 較佳之實施形態爲，連續顯示之子幀圖像間的移動量， 不是上述被投影面上沿著上述移動方向測定之像素間距的 概略2倍以上。 -10- 本紙張尺度適财S S家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公爱) 1227338V. Description of the invention (7 The above at least two child images include the black sub-images. A preferred embodiment is that they are displayed on the projected surface ... The above at least two sub-frame images include Ben Guru. Second, 蓼 l σ is a sub-frame image with reduced redundancy. A preferred embodiment is that the moving pattern ㈣ on the projected surface has a periodicity, and sincerely describes U sub quietly ^ Γ and the moving pattern In a period of at least one person, at least two movements of two pixel pitches are preferred. (The implementation mode is as follows. The movement pattern of the above-mentioned sub-frames is determined by the movement of three sub-frames in sequence. 6 The seed set is composed of several sub-sets, and the above 6 seed sets belong to any one of the two groups in a symmetric relationship of 2 in the direction of movement. Fortunately, the persistent complaint is that the above-mentioned sub-frame periodic motion pattern interactions include The sub-sets selected by the two groups are described above. A preferred embodiment of the dagger is that the periodic movement pattern of the sub-frames is composed of the movement of 18 sub-frames displayed in sequence, and interactively includes 6 sub-sets selected from the two groups respectively. In a preferred embodiment, the movement pattern of the above-mentioned sub-frames and periodic motions is composed of the movement of six sub-frames displayed in sequence, and interactively includes two sub-sets selected one by one from the two groups. The preferred embodiment is that the above is projected The moving pattern of the sub-frame image moving on the surface has periodicity, and the moving pattern includes moving the sub-love image at 4 different positions on the same straight line. A preferred embodiment is that the sub-frame images are continuously displayed. The amount of movement is not more than twice the approximate pixel pitch measured along the movement direction on the projected surface. -10- This paper size is suitable for SS Home Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public love) 1227338

車又佳之貝把形悲爲’上述子幀圖像1週期的移動圖案由 ，序，示之12個子·像構成，連續顯示之^貞圖像間的 私動里’不是上述被投影面上沿著上述移動方向測定之像 素間距的概略2倍以上。 、幸又佳 < 貫施形態爲，上述子幀圖像丨週期的移動圖案由 ，序顯TF又6個子幀圖像構成，連續顯示之子幀圖像間的 私動I，不是上述被投影面上沿著上述移動方向測定之像 素間距的概略2倍以上。 上述被投影面上之上述子幀的移動量，宜爲上述被投影 面上沿著上述移動方向測定之像素間距的概略整數倍。 較佳之實施形態爲，以上述圖像顯示面板顯示之上述子 幀圖像切換成下一個子幀時，ϋ述圖像顯示面板調變之 光線阻斷上述光線，不使其達到上述被投影面上。 較佳t實施形態爲，上述光控制手段因應波段，將上述 光源射出的光線朝向包含同一面内之不同方向，上述圖像 移動兀件在與上述面平行的方向移動上述子幀圖像。 較佳足貫施形態爲，上述圖像移動元件移動上述子幀圖 像的万向，與上述圖像顯示面板之顯示畫面的短邊方向一 致。 本發明之圖像顯示裝置具備圖像顯示面板，其具有可調 變各個光線的數個像素區域，並藉由被上述圖像顯示面板 所調變的光線形成圖像，且具備L分時顯示電路，其係自 構成上述圖像之幀圖像資料生成數個子幀圖像資料，以上 述圖像顯示面板顯示上述數個子幀圖像；及圖像移動元 -11- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4規格(210X 297公釐)Che Youjia Zhibei described the shape as 'the above-mentioned sub-frame image 1-period moving pattern is composed of, sequence, and 12 sub-images, which are continuously displayed in the private movement between the images.' The pixel pitch measured along the moving direction is roughly twice or more. Fortunately, the implementation mode is that the above-mentioned sub-frame image 丨 periodic movement pattern is composed of sequential TF and 6 sub-frame images, and the private movement I between successively displayed sub-frame images is not the above-mentioned being projected The pixel pitch measured on the surface along the moving direction is roughly twice or more. The moving amount of the sub-frames on the projected surface is preferably a rough integer multiple of the pixel pitch measured along the moving direction on the projected surface. In a preferred embodiment, when the sub-frame image displayed by the image display panel is switched to the next sub-frame, the light modulated by the image display panel blocks the light so as not to reach the projected surface. on. In a preferred embodiment, the light control means directs the light emitted by the light source toward different directions including the same plane in accordance with the wavelength band, and the image moving element moves the sub-frame image in a direction parallel to the plane. In a preferred embodiment, the image moving element moves the universal direction of the sub-frame image in accordance with the short-side direction of the display screen of the image display panel. The image display device of the present invention includes an image display panel having a plurality of pixel regions capable of adjusting each light, forming an image by the light modulated by the image display panel, and having an L time-division display. A circuit which generates a plurality of sub-frame image data from the frame image data constituting the image, and displays the plurality of sub-frame images with the image display panel; and an image moving element-11- This paper scale is applicable to China Standard (CNS) Α4 size (210X 297 mm)

裝 ηΗ

I227338 五、發明説明（9 中選：之面板所顯示之上述數個子賴圖像 ==圖像的光程移動，將屬於被上 ==像區域調變之不同波段的光線，藉由上述子悄 構成上述情圖像之第稀、二.…憶區域，其係儲存 托*…像（弟一種顏色的相關資料1二記憶區 二二系儲存構成上述蛸圖像之第二種顏色的相關資料； 弟二兄憶區域’其係儲存構成上述帕圖像之第三種顏色 自:：關貧料’冑由以預先設定之順序選擇性組合分別自上 迷第一 1己憶區域、筐-# #广 、 一罘一 δ己憶區域及第三記憶區域讀出之資 ，生成上述數個子幀的各個資料。 本發明之圖像顯示裝置具備圖像顯示面板， =各個光線的數個像素區域’並藉由被上述圖像顯示面板 所賙變的光線形成圖像，且具備：分時顯示電路，其係自 、成上ϋ圖像之幀圖像資料生成數個子幀圖像資料，以上 述圖像顯示面板顯示上述數個子幀圖像；及圖像移動元 牛其係使上述圖像顯示面板所顯示之上述數個子幢圖像 中選出之子㈣像的光程移動，將屬於被上述圖像顯示面 板，不同圖像區域調變之不同波段的光線，藉由上述子幅 的移動來合成’上述電路具備記憶上述數個子㈣像資料 的數個記憶區域’上述數個記憶區域内記憶有資料，該資 料包含：構成上述幅圖像之第一顏色相關資料、構成上述 情圖像〈第二顏色相關資料及構成上述中貞圖像之第三顏色 相關資料。 … 本發明之圖像顯示裝置具備圖像顯示面板，其具有光調 -12-I227338 V. Description of the invention (Selected in 9: The above-mentioned several sub-images displayed on the panel == the optical path movement of the image will belong to the light rays of different wavelengths that are modulated by the upper == image area. Quietly constitute the second, second, ... memory area of the above-mentioned love image, which stores the storage information of the ** image (the first color of the relevant information of the second memory area, the second and second series stores the correlation of the second color of the above-mentioned image). Data; Brother Brother's memory area 'It stores the third color that constitutes the above-mentioned par image. From :: guan poor material', you can selectively combine them from the first 1 memory area and basket of the fan in a preset order. -# #The data read from the wide, one delta memory area, and the third memory area generates each data of the above-mentioned several sub-frames. The image display device of the present invention is provided with an image display panel, = several of each light The pixel region 'forms an image by the light transformed by the image display panel, and includes: a time-sharing display circuit that generates a plurality of sub-frame image data from the frame image data of the upper image. To display the above number with the image display panel Sub-frame images; and the image moving element which moves the optical path of the child artifacts selected from the above several sub-frame images displayed on the image display panel, will belong to the image display panel, different images The light of different wavelengths in the area modulation is synthesized by the movement of the sub-frames. "The circuit has a plurality of memory areas for storing the above-mentioned sub-artifact data." The above-mentioned memory areas contain data. The data includes: The first color-related data of the above-mentioned image, the second color-related data constituting the above-mentioned emotional image, and the third-color-related data constituting the above-mentioned middle-zheng image. The image display device of the present invention includes an image display panel, It has light tone -12-

五、發明説明（10 ’交邵’其係週期性排列有屬 區域、屬於第二波段的第的第-顏色用像素 波m知 一顏色用像素區域、及屬於第三 被上、十、: 用像素區域’還具備圖像移動元件，可使 被上述光卩周變邵調變之弁 # p、甘7 先、，泉的先程週期性移動，橫切上述 第二：k想面上的第—像素顏色由，在第-期間被上述 顏多：德：像素區域凋變〈光線、在第二期間被上述第二 素區域調變之光線、及在第三期間被上述第三顏 m區域調變之光線所定義，上述假想面上之與上： '十·第fr接（$二像素的顏色由，在上述第-期間被上 ==用像素區域調變的光線、在上述第二期間被上 上色用像素區域調變的光線、及在上述第三期間被 顏色用像素區域調變的㈣所定義，上述假相面 上之與上述第二像素鄰接之第三像素的顏色由，在上㈣ = 月間被上述：三顏色用像素區域調變的光線、在上述第 :月：被上述罘-顏色用像素區域調變的光線、及在上述 弟月間被上述第二顏色用像素區域調變的光線所定義。 1明（電路裝置’具備：第_記憶區域，其係儲存以 象顯示面板之圖像顯示裝置顯示之構成悄圖像的第 像^相ΓΓ料；第二記憶區域’其係儲存構成上述幅圖 像的弟二顏色相關資料；及第三記憶區域，其係儲 上述貞圖像的第三顏色相關資料’藉由以預先設定之順序 组合分別自上述第一記憶區域、第二記憶區域及第三記情 =域項出之資料，生成應該分時顯示之數個子幢的各個資 -1 3- 本纸張尺度適财® ®家標準(CNS) Α4規格(210 Χ297公着 1 1227338 A7 B7V. Description of the invention (10 'Jiao Shao') It periodically arranges a belonging area, belongs to the first-color pixel wave m of the second band, and knows a color pixel area, and belongs to the third blanket, ten, and: The pixel area is also provided with an image moving element, which can be changed by the above-mentioned light-periodic change and shao modulation. # P 、 甘 7 先 、， 泉 's advance is periodically moved across the second: k The first-pixel color is caused by the above-mentioned color in the first period: German: the pixel area is faded <light, the light is modulated by the second prime area in the second period, and the third color is changed by the third color m in the third period. Area modulation is defined by the light on the above imaginary plane: '10 · th fr (the color of the two pixels is obtained during the above-mentioned period == the light modulated by the pixel area, in the above-mentioned The light that is modulated by the pixel region for coloring in the second period and the chirp that is modulated by the pixel region for color in the third period are defined. The color of the third pixel adjacent to the second pixel on the pseudo-phase surface is defined by , In the above ㈣ = month is the above: the three colors are adjusted by the pixel area Light is defined in the first month: the light modulated by the 罘 -color pixel region, and the light modulated by the second color pixel region during the month. The circuit device is provided with: _Memory area, which stores the first image ΓΓ of the quiet image displayed by the image display device of the display panel; second memory area, which stores the second color-related data that constitutes the above image; And the third memory area, which stores the third color-related data of the above-mentioned image, respectively, from the first memory area, the second memory area, and the third memory = field item by combining them in a preset order. Data to generate each asset of the several sub-blocks that should be displayed in time-sharing. 1 3- This paper size is suitable for financial ® ® Home Standard (CNS) Α4 specifications (210 × 297 public 1 1227338 A7 B7

五、發明説明（17 ) :光柵的折射角彼此相等，上述光程上，形成在位於光線 先射入端（一組所含基板的距離爲，上述光程上，形成在 位於光線後射入端之一組基板之距離的2倍。 本發明之圖像移動元件’使被圖像顯示面板調變之子綽 圖像的光程作週期性移動，藉此，可以將上述i圖像選 擇性的轉用在某個面内同一直線上之分離一個像素間距以 上之四個以上的位置上’且在上述光程上具有串聯排列成 的第-移動元件及第二移動元件，因上述第一移動元件造 成子幀圖像的移動量，設定爲因上述第二移動元件造成子 幀圖像之移動量的2倍。 ° 圖式之簡要説明 圖1爲本發明之投影型圖像顯示裝置的模型圖。 圖2爲液晶顯不面板的剖面模型圖。 圖3爲分色鏡的分光特性。 圖4爲説明自原圖像幀生成不同顏色圖像幀的方法。 圖5爲説明先前之彩色顯示與本發明之彩色顯示之間的 原理上差異。 曰、 圖6爲説明自不同顏色圖像幀資料生成三種子鴨資料的 方法。 、 圖7顯示子幀圖像的移動（圖像移動）的態樣。 圖8顯示數個子幀圖像的合成。 圖9爲構成圖像移動元件之旋轉板的正面圖。 圖10爲構成圖像移動元件之旋轉板的剖面圖。 圖11爲液晶顯示面板的應答曲線圖。 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（18 12顯示子_像切動的其他態樣 圖 圖13爲構成圖9之圖像移動 面圖。 元件之旋轉板改良範例的正 圖14爲反射型液晶顯示面板的剖面圖。 圖15顯示圖像移動的其他態樣。 圖16爲構成圖像移動元件之其他旋轉板的正面圖。 圖17爲構成圖像移動元件之其他旋轉板的正面圖。 圖18顯示圖像移動的其他態樣。 圖19顯不圖像移動的其他態樣。 圖20頭不圖像移動的其他態樣。 圖2 1顯示圖像移動的其他態樣。 圖22爲構成圖像移動元件之其他旋轉板的正面圖。 圖爲〜丁子幅圖像被線掃瞒切換狀態之圖像顯示面板 的部分正面圖。 圖24爲構成圖像移動㈣之其他旋轉板的正面圖。 圖25爲構成圖像移動元件之其他旋轉板的正面圖。 ，圖-示子+貞圖像之切換與圖像移動時間因圖像位置的 圖27馬構成圖像移動元件之透明板的正面圖 圖28顯示圖27之透明板的驅動方法。 圖29爲圖像移動元件的剖面圖。 圖3 0顯示圖像移動元件的操作。 圖3 1爲圖像移動元件的正面圖。 圖3 2爲圖像移動元件的斜視圖。V. Description of the invention (17): The refraction angles of the gratings are equal to each other. The above-mentioned optical path is formed at the first incidence end of the light (the distance of a set of contained substrates is, at the above-mentioned optical path, it is formed after the incidence of the light. The distance between a set of substrates is doubled. The image moving element of the present invention periodically moves the optical path of the image modulated by the image display panel, thereby selectively selecting the i image. Is used in a certain plane on the same straight line, separated by four or more positions above a pixel pitch, and has a first-moving element and a second-moving element arranged in series on the optical path, because the first The amount of movement of the sub-frame image caused by the moving element is set to be twice the amount of movement of the sub-frame image caused by the second moving element. ° Brief Description of the Drawings FIG. 1 is a diagram of a projection type image display device of the present invention. Model diagram. Figure 2 is a cross-sectional model of a liquid crystal display panel. Figure 3 is the spectral characteristics of a dichroic mirror. Figure 4 is a method for generating different color image frames from the original image frame. Figure 5 is a description of the previous color Display and the invention The principle difference between color display. Figure 6 illustrates the method of generating three sub-duck data from different color image frame data. Figure 7 shows the movement of the sub-frame image (image movement). 8 shows the synthesis of several sub-frame images. Fig. 9 is a front view of the rotating plate constituting the image moving element. Fig. 10 is a sectional view of the rotating plate constituting the image moving element. Fig. 11 is a response curve diagram of the liquid crystal display panel. 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (18 12 Display _ other patterns of image cutting Fig. 13 is a plan view of the moving image constituting the image of Fig. 9. Front view of an example of the improvement of the rotating plate of the element Fig. 14 is a reflective liquid crystal display Sectional view of the panel. Fig. 15 shows other aspects of image movement. Fig. 16 is a front view of other rotating plates constituting the image moving element. Fig. 17 is a front view of other rotating plates constituting the image moving element. Fig. 18 Shows other aspects of image movement. Figure 19 shows other aspects of image movement. Figure 20 shows other aspects of image movement. Figure 21 shows other aspects of image movement. Figure 22 shows the composition. Other rotations like moving elements Front view of the rotating plate. The picture is a partial front view of the image display panel in which the image of the Ding Zi is switched by the thread. Fig. 24 is a front view of the other rotating plate constituting the image moving frame. Fig. 25 is a structural view Front view of other rotating plates like moving elements. Figure-shown + image switching and image moving time due to image position. Figure 27. Front view of the transparent plate constituting the image moving element. Figure 28 shows Driving method of the transparent plate of 27. Fig. 29 is a sectional view of the image moving element. Fig. 30 shows the operation of the image moving element. Fig. 31 is a front view of the image moving element. Fig. 3 is an image moving element. Oblique view.

:297公釐) Ϊ227338 A7 ^—---- 67_ 五、發明説明（19 ) 一 -- 圖3 3爲圖像移動元件的斜視圖。 圖3 4爲圖像移動元件的斜視圖。 圖3 5爲圖像移動元件的斜視圖。 圖3 6爲圖像移動元件的剖面圖。 圖37爲顯示本發明之投影型圖像顯示裝置之系統構造範 例的方塊圖。 圖38爲模型顯示用於生成子幀圖像的電路構造。 圖39爲顯示生成子幀圖像之程序的計時圖。 圖40爲顯不使用兩塊圖像顯示面板之投影型圖像顯示裝 置之實施形態的構成圖。 圖41(a)顯示觀察者視線不移動時的圖像移動，顯示觀 察者視線移動時的圖像移動，（c)顯示使視線移動之觀察者 所觀察出的圖像移動狀態。 圖42(a)至（c)顯示傅里葉（F〇urier)轉換y_t空間之像素排列 (移動圖案）所獲得之頻譜的局部圖。 圖43顯不構成子幀圖像之移動圖案所獲得之六種子集合 1A〜3A及1B〜3B。 圖44顯示以6個子幀圖像（子集合丨八與子集合2B)爲1週期 之子幀圖像的移動圖案。 圖45顯示構成可實現圖44之移動圖案之圖像移動元件的 旋轉板。 圖46顯示本發明之實施形態所採用之圖像顯示面板的_ 種像素排列範例。 圖47顯示圖像顯示面板的另外像素排列範例。 _____ -22- 本紙張尺度適财g a *標準(CNS) A视格㈣X挪公爱) !227338: 297 mm) Ϊ227338 A7 ^ —---- 67_ V. Description of the invention (19) A-Figure 3 is a perspective view of an image moving element. Figure 34 is a perspective view of an image moving element. Figures 35 are perspective views of the image moving element. Fig. 36 is a sectional view of the image moving element. Fig. 37 is a block diagram showing a system configuration example of the projection type image display device of the present invention. FIG. 38 is a model showing a circuit configuration for generating a sub-frame image. FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing a procedure for generating a sub-frame image. Fig. 40 is a configuration diagram showing an embodiment of a projection type image display device using two image display panels. Figure 41 (a) shows the image movement when the observer's line of sight does not move, shows the image movement when the observer's line of sight moves, and (c) shows the image movement state observed by the observer who moved the line of sight. Figures 42 (a) to (c) show partial diagrams of the frequency spectrum obtained by Fourier transforming the pixel arrangement (moving pattern) in the y_t space. FIG. 43 shows six seed sets 1A to 3A and 1B to 3B obtained without moving patterns constituting a sub-frame image. FIG. 44 shows a moving pattern of a sub-frame image with 6 sub-frame images (sub-set 八 and sub-set 2B) as one cycle. Fig. 45 shows a rotary plate constituting an image moving element which can realize the moving pattern of Fig. 44. FIG. 46 shows an example of pixel arrangement of the image display panel used in the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 47 shows an example of another pixel arrangement of the image display panel. _____ -22- This paper is suitable for g a * standard (CNS) A as the standard X Xuanongai) 227338

圖48(a)爲顯示圖46之像素排列之傅里葉空間頻譜的局部 圖’（b)爲顯示圖47之像素排列之傅里葉空間頻譜的局部 圖。 圖49顯示i週期以18個子幀圖像（6個子集合）構成之子幀 圖像的移動圖案。 圖5〇顯示構成可實現圖49之移動圖案之圖像移動元件的 旋轉板。 圖5 1顯不圖像移動元件上使用之液晶層的應答曲線圖。 圖52顯示將兩組圖像移動元件串聯排列在光程上進行圖 像移動時過渡性產生的現象。 圖53顯示圖像移動元件之構造範例的斜視圖。 圖54顯不圖像移動元件之其他構造範例的斜視圖。 圖55顯示圖53之圖像移動元件之狀態變化情況。 圖56顯示圖53之圖像移動元件之狀態變化情況。 圖57顯示圖54之圖像移動元件之狀態變化情況。 圖5 8顯示圖54之圖像移動元件之狀態變化情況。 圖59顯示圖53之圖像移動元件的極化方向。 圖60顯示1週期以6個子蛸圖像（2個子集合）構成，圖像移 動量改變的子幀圖像移動圖案。 圖61顯示1週期以6個子幀圖像（2個子集合）構成，圖像移 動量一定的子幀圖像移動圖案。 圖62顯不1週期以6個子幀圖像（2個子集合）構成之子幀圖 像的移動圖案。 圖63爲構成圖像移動元件之旋轉板的无面圖。 ----- -23- 本紙張尺ϋ用中國國家標準(CNS) 1227338Fig. 48 (a) is a partial diagram showing the Fourier spatial spectrum of the pixel arrangement of Fig. 46 '(b) is a partial diagram showing the Fourier spatial spectrum of the pixel arrangement of Fig. 47. Fig. 49 shows a moving pattern of a sub-frame image composed of 18 sub-frame images (6 sub-sets) in the i period. Fig. 50 shows a rotary plate constituting an image moving element which can realize the moving pattern of Fig. 49. Figure 51 shows the response curve of the liquid crystal layer used on the image moving element. Fig. 52 shows a phenomenon which occurs transiently when two sets of image moving elements are arranged in series on the optical path for image movement. Fig. 53 is a perspective view showing a configuration example of an image moving element. Fig. 54 is a perspective view showing another configuration example of the image moving element. FIG. 55 shows a state change of the image moving element of FIG. 53. FIG. 56 shows a state change of the image moving element of FIG. 53. FIG. 57 shows a state change of the image moving element of FIG. 54. FIG. 58 shows the state change of the image moving element in FIG. 54. FIG. 59 shows the polarization direction of the image moving element of FIG. 53. Fig. 60 shows a sub-frame image movement pattern composed of 6 child images (2 sub-sets) in one cycle, and the image movement amount is changed. Fig. 61 shows a sub-frame image movement pattern consisting of 6 sub-frame images (2 sub-sets) with a fixed image movement amount per cycle. Fig. 62 shows a moving pattern of a sub-frame image composed of 6 sub-frame images (2 sub-sets) per cycle. Fig. 63 is a faceless view of a rotating plate constituting the image moving element. ----- -23- Chinese paper standard (CNS) 1227338

圖76顯示先前之場序制投影型圖像顯示裝置。 施形態 本發明如在不使用彩色濾光器之單板式投影型圖像顯示 裝置中，自構成圖像之各幀圖像資料生成數個子幀圖像資 料，藉由圖像顯示面板使數個子幀圖像以分時顯示。繼 續，藉由使這些子幀圖像依序在被投影面上移動，以屬於 被圖像顯示面板之不同像素區域調變之不同波段的光線 (R，G，B光）依序照射被投影面上的同一區域，藉此達成 高解像度的全色彩顯示。 本發明著眼於被投影面上之相當於一個像素的特定區域 時，於某個子幀顯示期間（以下稱「子幀期間」），其特定 區域如被紅色光（R光）照射，則下一子幀期間被綠色光（G 光）照射，再下一子幀期間被藍色光（B光）照射。因而，採 用本發明時，被投影面上之各像素的顏色係藉由r，G及B 光的分時照射來定義。 ’ 在先前之場序制投影型彩色圖像顯示裝置與本發明之 間，有如下所述的顯著差異。 a 先前之場序制係以R，G及B光交互照射圖像顯示面板。 因此，在某一個子場（Subfield)期間，圖像顯示面板的整個 像素區域係被R，G及B光中的任何一種光線照射。因而， 被投影面上之各子幀圖像雖由r，G及B光中的其中一種顏 色像素構成，但因R圖像用子幀、_G圖像用子幀及B圖像^ 子幀係以人體視覺之時間分離能力以下的短暫時間二位做 分時顯示，所以眼睛藉由殘影看出彩色圖像。 &quot;&quot; -25-Fig. 76 shows a conventional field sequential projection type image display device. Embodiments In the present invention, for example, in a single-plate projection-type image display device that does not use a color filter, a plurality of sub-frame image data are generated from each frame of image data constituting an image, and a plurality of sub-frames are made by an image display panel. The frame image is displayed in time-sharing. Continuing, by sequentially moving these sub-frame images on the projected surface, light rays (R, G, B light) of different wavelength bands that are modulated by different pixel regions of the image display panel are sequentially illuminated and projected The same area on the surface to achieve high-resolution full-color display. When the present invention focuses on a specific area corresponding to one pixel on the projected surface, during a certain sub-frame display period (hereinafter referred to as a "sub-frame period"), if the specific area is illuminated by red light (R light), the next The sub-frame period is illuminated with green light (G light), and the next sub-frame period is illuminated with blue light (B light). Therefore, when the present invention is adopted, the color of each pixel on the projection surface is defined by the time division irradiation of r, G, and B light. There are significant differences between the conventional field sequential projection type color image display device and the present invention as described below. a The previous field sequential system used R, G, and B light to illuminate the image display panel alternately. Therefore, during a certain subfield, the entire pixel area of the image display panel is illuminated by any one of R, G, and B light. Therefore, although each sub-frame image on the projected surface is composed of one color pixel of r, G, and B light, the sub-frames for R image, sub-frame for _G image, and B-image ^ The time display is based on the short time below the time separation ability of human vision, so the eye can see the color image through the afterimage. &quot; &quot; -25-

1227338 A7 _ _B7 五、發明説明（23 ) ' 而本發明使用之各個子幀圖像，如以後詳述的，係由 R ’ G及B光的組合來構成。亦即，在某一個子幢期間，被 投影面被圖像顯示面板所調變之R，G及B光照射。被圖像 顯示面板所調變之R，G及B光，分別在各子幀期間照射被 投影面的不同位置，以時間性的合成來顯示全彩色的幀圖 本發明藉由圖像移動元件來執行此種r，G及B光的時間 性合成。該圖像移動元件配置在圖像顯示面板與被投影面 之間，使被圖像顯示面板所調變之光線路徑（光程）作週期 性、規則性的改變。 本發明的適用範圍並不限定於投影型圖像顯示裝置，雖 亦可適用於指示器（Viewer)及頭戴式顯示器等直視型圖像 顯示裝置，不過，以下係以投影型的圖像顯示裝置爲例來 説明本發明的較佳實施形態。 首先，參照圖1來説明第1種實施形態的裝置構造。 (第1種實施形態） 本實施形態之投影型圖像顯示裝置具備··光源1 ;液晶 顯示面板8 ;光控制手段，其係因應波段，使光源1射出之 光線在液晶顯示面板8所對應之像素區域上聚光；及投影 光學系統’其係將被液晶顯tf面板8所調變之光線投射在 被投影面上。 該投影型圖像顯示裝置還具備―：球面鏡2，其係將自光 源1向後方射出的光線（白色光）反射到前方；聚光鏡3，其 係使光源1及球面鏡2所射出的光線成平行光束；及分色鏡 -26- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公爱) 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（24 ) 4〜6 ’其係因應波段，將該光束分離成數條光束。被分色 鏡4〜6反射的光線’因應波段”乂不同的角度射入微型透 鏡陣列7内。微型透鏡陣列7設置在液晶顯示面板8的光源 端基板上，以不同角度射入微型透鏡障列7的光線在各個 不同位置所對應的像素區域上聚光。 本投影型圖像顯示裝置的投影光學系統包含向場透鏡9 及投影透鏡11，將穿透液晶顯示面板8的光束12投射在螢 幕（被投影面）13上。本實施形態在向場透鏡9與投影透鏡“ 之間設置有圖像移動元件10。圖1中顯示有以圖像移動元 件10在被投影面上平行方向移動的光束，！2b。光束移 動時’圖像私動元件1 〇只須***液晶顯示面板8與勞幕U 間的任何位置即可，亦可配置在投影透鏡U與螢幕13之 間0 其次’依序説明本投影型圖像顯示裝置的各構成要素。 本實施形態的光源1使用光輸出150W，弧長5 mm，孤徑 2.2 mm的卣化金屬燈，並將該燈配置成弧長方向與圖式的 紙面平行。光源1除了鹵化金屬燈之外，亦可使用齒素 燈、超鬲壓水銀燈或佳能燈（Canon Lamp)等。本實施形態 所使用的光源1係射出包含對應於三原色之三種波段光線 的白色光。 在光源1的背面配置有球面鏡2，在光源1的前面配置有 孔徑80 mm 0，焦點距離60 mm的聚光鏡3。球面鏡2配置 成其中新與光源1之發光部的中心一致，聚光鏡3配置成其 焦點與光源1的中心一致。 -27- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 1227338 A7 _____ B7__ 五、發明説明（25 ) 藉由此種配置構造，自光源1射出的光線被聚光鏡3平行 化，照射液晶顯示面板8。通過聚光鏡3之光線的平行度， 如在弧長方向（與圖1紙面平行的方向）約2·2。，在弧徑方 向約1 ° 。 本實施形態所使用的液晶顯示面板8係在光源端的透明 基板上配置有微型透鏡陣列7的穿透型液晶顯示元件。雖 然液晶的種類與操作模式不拘，不過以可執行快速操作者 爲宜。本實施形態係以絞絲狀（Twisted Nematic，丁Ν)模式 操作。液晶顯示面板8中設有用於調變光線的數個像素區 域’不過，本説明書中所謂的「像素區域」，係指圖像顯 示面板中，在空間上分離的各個光調變部。液晶顯示面板 8以對應於各個像素區域的像素電極，在液晶層的對應部 分施加有電壓，藉由這個部分的光學特性改變來進行光的 調變。 該液晶顯示面板8以非交錯方式驅動如68(Η) χ 1〇24(巧的 掃瞄線。液晶顯示面板8的像素區域在透明基板上成平面 排列，本實施形態之像素區域的間距，沿著水平方向之測 定値與沿著垂直方向的測量値均爲26 A m。另外，本實施 形態之R用、G用、B用像素區域係分別沿著畫面的水平方 向排列成線條狀，各微型透鏡被分配在包含三個像素區域 (R用、G用、B用像素區域）的集合（Set)内。 ^ 一 如圖1所示，照射液晶顯示面板_8&lt;R，G&amp;B光，爲以分 色鏡4, 5及6分離之自光源i射出的白色光，並以不同^ 射入液晶顯示面板8上的微型透鏡陣列7内。如圖2所示， -28-1227338 A7 _ _B7 V. Description of the invention (23) 'The sub-frame images used in the present invention, as detailed later, are composed of a combination of R ′ G and B light. That is, during a certain sub-building, the R, G, and B light modulated by the projection surface by the image display panel is illuminated. The R, G, and B lights modulated by the image display panel illuminate different positions of the projected surface during each sub-frame, respectively, and display a full-color frame with time composition. The present invention uses an image moving element To perform such temporal synthesis of r, G, and B light. The image moving element is arranged between the image display panel and the surface to be projected, so that the light path (optical path) modulated by the image display panel is changed periodically and regularly. The scope of application of the present invention is not limited to a projection-type image display device, and may also be applied to a direct-view image display device such as a pointer (viewer) and a head-mounted display. However, the following is a projection-type image display. The device is taken as an example to describe a preferred embodiment of the present invention. First, the device structure of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1. (First Embodiment) The projection-type image display device according to this embodiment includes a light source 1; a liquid crystal display panel 8; and a light control means that responds to the wavelength band and corresponds to the light emitted from the light source 1 on the liquid crystal display panel 8. Condensing light on the pixel area; and the projection optical system 'projects the light modulated by the liquid crystal display tf panel 8 onto the projected surface. This projection-type image display device further includes: a spherical mirror 2 that reflects the light (white light) emitted from the light source 1 to the rear; a condenser lens 3 that causes the light emitted by the light source 1 and the spherical mirror 2 to be parallel Beams; and dichroic mirrors-26- This paper size applies Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 public love) 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (24) 4 ~ 6 'This beam is divided into numbers according to the band Light beams. The light reflected by the dichroic mirrors 4 to 6 enters the micro lens array 7 at different angles in accordance with the wavelength band. The micro lens array 7 is disposed on the light source end substrate of the liquid crystal display panel 8 and enters the micro lens barrier at different angles. The light from the column 7 is focused on the pixel regions corresponding to the different positions. The projection optical system of the projection image display device includes a field lens 9 and a projection lens 11, and projects a light beam 12 penetrating the liquid crystal display panel 8 on On the screen (projected surface) 13. In this embodiment, an image moving element 10 is provided between the field lens 9 and the projection lens ". Fig. 1 shows a light beam that moves in parallel with the image moving element 10 on the projection surface. 2b. When the light beam is moving, 'the image private moving element 1 can be inserted anywhere between the liquid crystal display panel 8 and the curtain U, and can also be placed between the projection lens U and the screen 13'. Next, the projection type is explained in order. Each component of the image display device. The light source 1 of this embodiment uses a halogenated metal lamp with a light output of 150 W, an arc length of 5 mm, and a solitary diameter of 2.2 mm, and the lamp is arranged so that the arc length direction is parallel to the paper surface of the drawing. In addition to the metal halide lamp, the light source 1 may be a toothed lamp, an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, a Canon lamp, or the like. The light source 1 used in this embodiment emits white light including light in three wavelength bands corresponding to the three primary colors. A spherical mirror 2 is arranged on the back of the light source 1, and a condenser 3 with an aperture of 80 mm 0 and a focal distance of 60 mm is arranged on the front of the light source 1. The spherical mirror 2 is arranged so that it newly coincides with the center of the light-emitting portion of the light source 1, and the condenser lens 3 is arranged so that its focal point coincides with the center of the light source 1. -27- This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) 1227338 A7 _____ B7__ V. Description of the invention (25) With this configuration, the light emitted from light source 1 is parallelized by condenser 3 To illuminate the liquid crystal display panel 8. The parallelism of the light passing through the condenser lens 3 is, for example, about 2 · 2 in the arc length direction (direction parallel to the paper surface in FIG. 1). , About 1 ° in the arc radius direction. The liquid crystal display panel 8 used in this embodiment is a transmissive liquid crystal display element in which a micro lens array 7 is arranged on a transparent substrate on the light source side. Although the type and operation mode of the liquid crystal are not limited, it is preferable to perform fast operation. This embodiment operates in a twisted-nematic (Twisted Nematic) mode. The liquid crystal display panel 8 is provided with a plurality of pixel regions for modulating light. However, the term "pixel region" as used in this specification refers to each light modulation unit that is spatially separated in the image display panel. The liquid crystal display panel 8 uses a pixel electrode corresponding to each pixel region to apply a voltage to a corresponding portion of the liquid crystal layer, and performs light modulation by changing the optical characteristics of this portion. The liquid crystal display panel 8 is driven in a non-interlaced manner, such as 68 (Η) χ 1024 (smart scanning lines. The pixel regions of the liquid crystal display panel 8 are arranged in a plane on a transparent substrate. The pitch of the pixel regions in this embodiment, Both the measurement along the horizontal direction and the measurement along the vertical direction are 26 A m. In addition, the R, G, and B pixel areas in this embodiment are arranged in a line shape along the horizontal direction of the screen. Each micro lens is allocated in a set including three pixel regions (pixel regions for R, G, and B). ^ As shown in FIG. 1, the liquid crystal display panel is illuminated 8 &lt; R, G &amp; B The light is white light emitted from the light source i separated by the dichroic mirrors 4, 5 and 6, and is incident into the micro lens array 7 on the liquid crystal display panel 8 with different ^. As shown in FIG. 2, -28-

1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（26 ) 藉由適切設定R，G及B光的射入角度，以微型透鏡7適切 分配至對應於各波段的像素區域内。本實施形態之微型透 鏡7的焦點距離設計成255 vm，各光束構成的角度爲5.8。。 詳細而言，係R光對液晶顯示面板8垂直射入，B光及g光 係分別對R光以5.8。的角度射入。 分色鏡4，5及6具有圖3所示的分光特性，分別選擇性的 反射綠色（G)、紅色（R)及藍色（B)光。g光的波段爲520〜580 nm ’ R光的波段爲600〜650 nm，B光的波段爲420〜480 nm。 本貫施形態雖是使用分色鏡4〜6及微型透鏡陣列7，將三 原色光聚光在對應的像素區域上，不過亦可使用其他的光 學手段（如具備光之繞射、分光功能的穿透型全息）。 因上述之液晶顯示面板8係以非交錯驅動，所以1秒鐘顯 不有60幀的圖像，分配給各幀的時間（幀期間）丁爲1/6〇秒， 亦即 T= 1/60(秒）# 16.6(毫秒）。 另外’以交錯驅動時，因係將畫面内的掃瞄線區分成偶 數線·與奇數線來交互顯示，所以丁=1/30(秒）与33·3(毫 秒）°又，分割成構成各幀之偶數場及奇數場的時間（丨場 時間），係1 / 60 %= 16 ·6(毫秒）。 本實施形態係將構成圖像之各幀圖像的資訊（資料）逐次 儲存在幀記憶體内，依據自該幀記憶體選擇性讀出的資訊 來依序形成數個子f貞圖像。以下詳細説明子幀圖像的形成 方法。 例如，某幀的圖像（幀圖像）爲圖4(a)所示的圖像。該幀圖 像應該以彩色顯示，各像素的顏色，依據定義上述幀圖像 •29- 中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（27 ) 的資料來決定。另外，以交錯驅動時，某φ貞的圖像可以本 説明書中之「鴨圖像」同樣的處理來獲得。 先前之三板式投影型圖像顯示裝置，係自上述資料，# 離各像素之R，G及B光用的資料，並如圖4(b)，（c)及（d)户# 示’生成R圖像用t貞、G圖像用鴨及b圖像用幢的各資料。 繼續使用R，G及B用的三塊圖像顯示面板，分別同時顯示 R圖像用幀、G圖像用幀及B圖像用幀，在被投影面上重 疊。圖5(a)模型顯示被投影面13上之某個特定像素由r，〇 及B圖像用幀所重疊的情況。 而先前之單板式投影型圖像顯示裝置則是在一塊顯示面 板上，將R，G及B用圖像區域分別設置在不同位置。繼 續，依據R，G及B用各個資料，在r，G及B用圖像區域進 行光#1變，在被投影面上形成彩色圖像。此時，因被投影 面上，R，G及B光係照射在比人體視覺之空間性分離能力 小的區域内，所以R，G及B光儘管相互在空間上分離，但 是在人體眼睛看出的是所構成的一個像素。圖5(b)模型顯 示被投影面13上之某個特定像素經R，〇及B光照射的情 本貫施形態與以上之先前方式不同 的同一區域依序照射有被一塊圖像員 區域所調變的R，G及B光，在該同 係在被投影面1 3上1227338 A7 B7 V. Explanation of the invention (26) By appropriately setting the incident angles of the R, G, and B light, the micro lenses 7 are appropriately allocated to the pixel regions corresponding to each band. The focal distance of the micro lens 7 of this embodiment is designed to be 255 vm, and the angle formed by each beam is 5.8. . Specifically, the R light is incident on the liquid crystal display panel 8 vertically, and the B light and the G light are respectively 5.8 to the R light. Angle of injection. The dichroic mirrors 4, 5 and 6 have the spectral characteristics shown in Fig. 3, and selectively reflect green (G), red (R), and blue (B) light, respectively. The wavelength of g light is 520 to 580 nm. The wavelength of R light is 600 to 650 nm, and the wavelength of B light is 420 to 480 nm. Although the present embodiment uses the dichroic mirrors 4 to 6 and the micro lens array 7 to condense the three primary colors of light onto the corresponding pixel area, other optical means (such as those with the function of diffracting and splitting light) Transmissive holography). Because the above-mentioned liquid crystal display panel 8 is driven in a non-interlaced manner, an image of 60 frames is not displayed in one second, and the time (frame period) allocated to each frame is 1/6 seconds, that is, T = 1 / 60 (seconds) # 16.6 (milliseconds). In addition, in the case of interlaced driving, the scanning lines in the screen are divided into even-numbered lines and odd-numbered lines for interactive display, so D = 1/30 (seconds) and 33 · 3 (milliseconds) °. The time of even field and odd field (field time) of each frame is 1/60% = 16 · 6 (milliseconds). In this embodiment, information (data) of each frame image constituting an image is sequentially stored in a frame memory, and a plurality of sub-frame images are sequentially formed based on information selectively read from the frame memory. The method of forming a sub-frame image will be described in detail below. For example, an image (frame image) of a certain frame is an image shown in FIG. 4 (a). The frame image should be displayed in color. The color of each pixel is based on the definition of the above frame image. 29- Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) 1227338 A7 B7 V. Information of the invention description (27) To decide. In addition, in the case of interlaced driving, an image of a certain φzhen can be obtained by the same processing as the "duck image" in this specification. The previous three-panel projection image display device is based on the above data, # data for R, G, and B light from each pixel, as shown in Figure 4 (b), (c), and (d) 户 # The data for the R image t frame, the G image duck, and the b image frame are generated. Continue to use the three image display panels for R, G, and B, which simultaneously display the R image frame, the G image frame, and the B image frame, respectively, and overlap on the projected surface. The model in FIG. 5 (a) shows a case where a specific pixel on the projection surface 13 is overlapped by the frames for r, 0 and B images. In the prior art, a single-plate projection image display device has a display panel in which R, G, and B image areas are set at different positions, respectively. Then, according to the data for R, G, and B, light # 1 is changed in the image area for r, G, and B to form a color image on the surface to be projected. At this time, because the R, G, and B lights are irradiated in a region smaller than the spatial separation ability of human vision, the R, G, and B lights are separated from each other in space, but they are seen by human eyes. Out is a pixel that is formed. The model in Figure 5 (b) shows that a specific pixel on the projection surface 13 is illuminated by R, 0, and B light. The pattern is different from the previous method, and the same area is sequentially illuminated by an imager area. The modulated R, G, and B light are on the same plane as the projected surface 1 3

的R，G及B光爲被一塊 曼於面13上的任意像素時，該像素的 〖勺方式來執行。但是，夠成一個像素 塊圖像顯示面板之不同像素區域調 -30- 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（28 ) &quot;一~^ ---- 又^ ·點與先前之場序制有很大不同。圖5(。）模型顯示 被技〜面13足某個特定像素以分時照射之r，〇及6光在1幀 、月門所口成的情況。圖5(〇)之左側部分所顯示的畫面對慮 於:塊圖像顯示面板8之不同的三個子㈣像。 從圖5(a)〜（c)中可知，本實施形態僅使用一塊顯示面 板即可達到與二板式同樣高解像度與亮度的全色彩顯 示〇 /、人參照圖6來詳細説明子幀圖像的構造。 圖6的左側邵分顯示有儲存在R，〇及b用幀記憶體内的 R G及B圖像幀的資♦斗。圖6之右側冑分顯示有顯示子幀 1 3。本貝知形怨係在某幀最初的3分之^期間（第一子幀期 間）’在被投影面上顯示有顯示子幀i的圖像。繼續在下一 個3刀之1的期間（第二子幀期間）顯示有顯示子幀2的圖像， 在最後的之1的期間（第三子幀期間）顯示有顯示子幀3的 圖像。本實施形態的這三個子幀圖像係如圖7所示的移 動，·在時間上分離而被合成的結果，人體眼睛看出的是如 圖4(a)所示的原圖像。 其次，以顯示子幀1爲例，詳細説明子幀圖像的資料構 成。 首先，如圖6所示，顯示子幀丨的第一列像素區域用資料 由記憶在R用幀記憶體内之第一列像素（R1)的相關資料所 形成。顯示子幀1的第二列像素區哉用資料由記憶在G用幀 έ己憶體内之第二列像素（G2)的相關資料所形成。顯示子幀 1的第一列像素區域用資料由記憶在Β用巾貞記憶體内之第三 -31- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4規格(21〇 X 297公复) 1227338 A7 —_B7 _ 五、發明説明（29 ) 列像素（B3)的相關資料所形成。顯示子幀1的第四列像素 區域用資料由έ己憶在R用Ί»貞f己憶體内之弟四列像素（R4)的 相關資料所形成。以下，以同樣的程序構成顯示子幀1的 資料。 顯示子幀2及3之資料的構成與顯示子幀1相同。例如， 顯示子幀2的第0列像素區域用資料，由記憶在b用幀記憶 體内的第一列像素（B1)相關資料所形成，顯示子幀2的第 一列像素區域用資料，由記憶在R用幀記憶體内的第二列 像素（R2)相關資料所形成，顯示子幀2的第二列像素區域 用資料，由記憶在G用幀記憶體内的第三列像素（G3)相關 資料所形成，顯示子禎2的第三列像素區域用資料，由記 憶在B用幀記憶體内的第四列像素（B4)相關資料所形成。 如此，藉由以預先設定的順序來組合自r，G及b用各悄 記憶體讀出的資料，生成以分時顯示之子幀的各個資料。 結果，各子幀用資料雖然包含R，G及B之全部顏色相關資 訊，但是R，G及B係分別僅具有在整個空間上3分之丨區域 的相關資訊。更詳細而言，顯示子幀i的R資訊，從圖6上 可知，僅爲應該形成幀圖像之第丨，4, 7, 1〇••列之像素的相 關資訊。幀圖像之其他列之像素相關的尺資訊則分配至顯 示子幀2及3上。 本實施形態雖然在圖像顯示面板的各像素區域始終顯示 相同顏色的資訊，不過藉由在各_子幀間使圖像移動了投 影，，可以合成中貞圖像。另外，從圖6中可知，圖像顯示: 板之·像素區域的全部列數僅比構成一個子幀圖像之像素的 •32-When the R, G, and B light is an arbitrary pixel on the surface 13, the pixel is executed in the spoon mode. However, it is enough to adjust the different pixel areas of a pixel block image display panel -30-1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (28) &quot; 一 ~ ^ ---- Again ^ · The point is very similar to the previous field sequence Big difference. Figure 5 (.) The model shows the situation in which a certain pixel of 13 feet is illuminated in a time-sharing mode with r, 0, and 6 lights in a frame and at the entrance of the moon gate. The screen shown in the left part of FIG. 5 (0) considers the three different sub-images of the block image display panel 8. As can be seen from Figs. 5 (a) to (c), in this embodiment, only one display panel can be used to achieve full-color display with the same high resolution and brightness as that of the two-plate type. / Refer to FIG. 6 for a detailed description of the sub-frame image. The construction. The left side of FIG. 6 shows the data of the R G and B image frames stored in the R, 0 and b frame memories. The right subdivision of FIG. 6 shows a display sub-frame 1 3. Benbei knows that the image showing the sub-frame i is displayed on the projected surface during the first three-thirds of the period (the first sub-frame period) '. Continue to display the image of display sub-frame 2 in the next period of 3 times (second sub-frame period), and display the image of display sub-frame 3 in the last period (third sub-frame period). The three sub-frame images in this embodiment are moved as shown in FIG. 7, and as a result of being separated in time and synthesized, the human eyes can see the original image shown in FIG. 4 (a). Next, the display sub-frame 1 is taken as an example to describe the material composition of the sub-frame image in detail. First, as shown in FIG. 6, the data for the first row of pixel regions in the display sub-frame are formed from the data about the first row of pixels (R1) stored in the R frame memory. The data for the second row of pixels in the display sub-frame 1 is formed by the relevant data of the second row of pixels (G2) memorized in the G frame. The data for the first column of the pixel area of the display sub-frame 1 is stored in the third memory of the B-frame memory. -31- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇X 297 public copy) 1227338 A7 —_B7 _ 5. The description of the invention (29) is formed by the relevant data of the pixel (B3). The data for the pixel area of the fourth column of the display sub-frame 1 is formed by the related data of the four pixels (R4) of the younger brother in the body of R. In the following, the data of the display sub-frame 1 is constructed by the same procedure. The composition of the data of display subframes 2 and 3 is the same as that of display subframe 1. For example, the data for the pixel region of the 0th column of the display sub-frame 2 is formed by the data of the first column of pixels (B1) stored in the frame memory of the b for display, and the data for the first column of the pixel region of the sub-frame 2 is displayed. It is formed by the data related to the second row of pixels (R2) stored in the R frame memory, and displays the data for the second row of pixel regions in subframe 2. The third row of pixels (stored in the G frame memory ( G3) The related data is used to display the data for the third row of pixel regions of the display element 2 and is formed from the fourth row of pixels (B4) related data stored in the frame memory of B. In this way, by combining the data read from r, G, and b with their respective memories in a preset order, each data of the sub-frame displayed in a time-division manner is generated. As a result, although the data for each sub-frame includes all the color-related information of R, G, and B, R, G, and B each have only relevant information of a three-thirds area in the entire space. In more detail, the R information of the display sub-frame i can be seen from FIG. 6, which is only relevant information of the pixels that should form the first, fourth, seventh, tenth, and tenth columns of the frame image. The ruler information related to the pixels in the other columns of the frame image is allocated to the display sub-frames 2 and 3. In this embodiment, although the information of the same color is always displayed in each pixel region of the image display panel, the image can be synthesized by moving the image between the sub-frames and projecting. In addition, as can be seen from Figure 6, the image display: The total number of columns in the panel's pixel area is only greater than the number of pixels that make up a sub-frame image.

1227338 A7 —____ B7 五、發明説明（3〇 ) 全部列數多2列。這2列係作爲圖像移動的邊緣功能。 其次，參照圖8及圖9來説明移動之數個子幀圖像合成一 個幀圖像的情況。 首先參照圖8。圖8(a)顯示投影在螢幕等被投影面上之3 個子幀圖像之一部分的斜視圖。圖中自左起依序模型顯示 顯示子幀1〜3及合成的幀圖像。圖8(b)顯示像素顯示面板 的對應像素區域，自左起依序顯示顯示子幀1〜3的對應部 分。顯示子幀1之第3列〜第7列、顯示子幀2之第2列〜第6 列、及顯示子幀3之第1列〜第5列，在被投影面上，時間上 分離而空間上重疊來構成1塊幀圖像。 如圖8(b)所示，圖像顯示面板上之r，g及B用像素區域 的位置雖然固定，但是藉由配置在圖像顯示面板與被投影 面之間之圖像移動元件的動作，子幀圖像的光程移動，達 成如圖8(a)所示之子幀圖像的合成。 其次，説明子幀圖像的移動方法。 本實施形態係採用由具有圖9所示之3個透明區域A〜C之 圓盤狀玻璃板（折射構件）20所製成的圖像移動元件。該圓 盤狀玻璃板20係由折射率爲m之BK7玻璃所形成，透明 區域A的厚度設定在〇·7 mm，透明區域B的厚度設定在υ mm ’透明區域C的厚度設定在15 mm。該玻璃板以圓-盤的 中心爲軸，被支撑成可以旋轉的狀態，玻璃板的主面配置 成與光軸之間形成70.2。的角度圖1〇部分模型顯示横切 光軸之玻璃板的剖面。假設與裝軸垂直之面與玻璃板主面 之間的角度爲Θ 〇，玻璃厚度爲d，玻璃折射率爲心時，則 -33- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公爱了 Ϊ227338 A7 ' ----------------------- — 五、發明說明（31 ) 光轴因折射產生的移動量△ X以下列公式表示： Δ d · sin ^ 〇(l-cos ^ 〇//(ng2-sin2 θ 〇)1/2) 本實施形態係設計成各透明區域A〜C的玻璃厚度d具有 不同的値，且光軸之移動量△ X隨玻璃板20的旋轉作週期 十生的改變。 被圖像顯示面板調變的光束，藉由圖上未顯示的驅動裝 置（馬達等），穿透旋轉之玻璃板2〇之透明區域a〜c中的任 —區域，到達被投影面。本實施形態之穿透透明區域B之 光束的光程，僅對穿透透明區域A之光束的光程移動261 &quot;m。此外，同樣的，穿透透明區域c之光束的光程，僅 對穿透透明區域B之光束的光程移動26.1&quot; m。另外，此處 之移動量（=26· 1# m)爲換算成在圖像顯示面板上移動量的 値’相當於像素區域之垂直間距來設計圖像移動元件。該 移動量當調整各透明區域A〜C的厚度時，可以改變成其他 任意値。例如，將各透明區域A〜c的厚度變成14倍時，則 移動量爲26.1 X 1.4# m。 本實施形態之光束移動△ X的產生方向（移動方向）與圖像 的垂直方向相等，不過光束的移動方向亦可與圖像的水平 万向相等，亦可與傾斜方向相等。重要的在於，牙多動量具 f以像素爲單位的大小，各子幀圖像的像素在被投影面上 實質上重疊。換言之，被投影面上的圖像移動量只須 投影面上，沿著移動方向所測定之像素間距的概略整數倍 即可。 ° 例如將光束的移動方向在水平方向相等時，只須使圖ι〇 -34-1227338 A7 —____ B7 V. Description of the invention (30) The total number of columns is 2 more. These two columns function as the edge of the image movement. Next, a case where a plurality of moving sub-frame images are combined into one frame image will be described with reference to Figs. 8 and 9. First, refer to FIG. 8. Fig. 8 (a) shows a perspective view of a part of three sub-frame images projected on a projected surface such as a screen. The model is displayed sequentially from the left in the figure. The sub-frames 1 to 3 and the synthesized frame images are displayed. Fig. 8 (b) shows the corresponding pixel area of the pixel display panel, and the corresponding parts of the display sub-frames 1 to 3 are sequentially displayed from the left. The third column to the seventh column of the display subframe 1, the second column to the sixth column of the display subframe 2, and the first column to the fifth column of display subframe 3 are separated in time on the projection surface. Spatially overlap to form one frame image. As shown in FIG. 8 (b), although the positions of the pixel regions for r, g, and B on the image display panel are fixed, the operation of the image moving element is arranged between the image display panel and the surface to be projected. The optical path of the sub-frame image is shifted to achieve the synthesis of the sub-frame image as shown in FIG. 8 (a). Next, a method of moving a sub-frame image will be described. This embodiment uses an image moving element made of a disc-shaped glass plate (refractive member) 20 having three transparent areas A to C as shown in FIG. 9. The disc-shaped glass plate 20 is formed of BK7 glass with a refractive index of m. The thickness of the transparent area A is set to 0.7 mm, the thickness of the transparent area B is set to υ mm, and the thickness of the transparent area C is set to 15 mm. . This glass plate is supported in a rotatable state with the center of the disc as the axis, and the main surface of the glass plate is arranged to form 70.2 with the optical axis. Figure 10: Part of the model shows a section of a glass plate transverse to the optical axis. Assume that the angle between the surface perpendicular to the mounting axis and the main surface of the glass plate is Θ 〇, the thickness of the glass is d, and the refractive index of the glass is at the center. The public loved Ϊ 227338 A7 '----------------------- — V. Description of the invention (31) The amount of movement of the optical axis due to refraction △ X is given by the following formula Representation: Δ d · sin ^ 〇 (l-cos ^ 〇 // (ng2-sin2 θ 〇) 1/2) This embodiment is designed so that the glass thickness d of each transparent region A ~ C has different 値, and the light The amount of movement of the axis △ X changes ten cycles with the rotation of the glass plate 20. The light beam modulated by the image display panel penetrates the rotating glass plate 2 by a driving device (motor, etc.) not shown in the figure. Any one of the transparent areas a to c reaches the projected surface. In this embodiment, the optical path of the light beam that penetrates the transparent area B is shifted only by the optical path of the light beam that penetrates the transparent area A 261 &quot; m In addition, similarly, the optical path length of the light beam penetrating the transparent region c is shifted by 26.1 &quot; m only for the optical path length of the light beam penetrating the transparent region B. In addition, here Momentum (= 26 · 1 # m) is a 移动 ′ converted into the amount of movement on the image display panel, which is equivalent to the vertical distance between pixel regions to design an image moving element. The amount of movement is to adjust the thickness of each transparent area A to C Can be changed to any other value. For example, when the thickness of each transparent area A to c is 14 times, the movement amount is 26.1 X 1.4 # m. The beam movement △ X generation direction (moving direction) of this embodiment It is the same as the vertical direction of the image, but the moving direction of the light beam can also be the same as the horizontal universal direction of the image, and it can also be the same as the oblique direction. It is important that the tooth multi-moment measuring device f is in the unit of pixel, each sub-frame The pixels of the image substantially overlap on the projected surface. In other words, the amount of image movement on the projected surface only needs to be a rough integer multiple of the pixel pitch measured along the direction of projection. ° For example, the beam When the moving directions are equal in the horizontal direction, just make

1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（32 ) 的玻璃板向光轴中心旋轉9G。，光束沿著圖像的水平方向 移動即可。 圖11顯π圖像顯示面板8中，調變光線部分（各像素區域） 之光穿透率對施加電壓的應答曲線。本實施形態的各像素 區域具有以電極夾住液晶層的構造，因液晶的應答速度有 限，所以在開始施加電壓的瞬間，光穿透率不致達到最大 値。亦即，當光穿透率達到最大水準，完成由陰暗狀態至 明焭狀怨的變化，自開始施加電壓起延遲。此外，自停止 犯加％壓至光穿透率爲最小値（零）之間也產生時間上的延 遲。 本實施形怨，如圖8(b)所示，需要在圖像顯示面板上顯 π足各子幀期間不同的子幀圖像。若需要不能忽視子幀圖 像足顯示切換的時間時，各子幀期間之最初部分的子幀圖 像亮度不足，另外，於子幀期間（施加電壓期間）結束後， 茲子幀圖像仍暫時作不必要的顯示。因而，縱使子幀圖像 移動·，因圖像顯示面板之應答速度緩慢而顯示有前一個子 幀圖像，或重疊在下一個子幀圖像上，僅前一個子幀圖像 被顯示。此時，被合成之幀圖像上發生輪廓等摻雜及重像 (雙重寫入）。 以下參照圖12來説明上述摻雜及重像發生的原因。圖玉2 模型顯示構成第η (η爲正整數）幀圖像之子幀圖像的特定像 素行，與構成第η+1幀圖像之子幀圖像對應的像素行。各 像素行上下排列，係因圖像移動元件使子幀圖像的光程作 上下和動。圖12中，顯示因圖像顯示面板的應答緩慢，自 _____-35- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1227338 A7 _____ B7 五、發明説明（33 ) 明亮狀態轉變成陰暗狀態時間延遲的像素。例如，構成第 η幀圖像的最初子幀圖像中，處於明亮狀態的「b」像素雖 在下一個子幀僅向下方移動1像素部分，但是尚未完全轉 變成陰暗狀態。再於下一個子幀，再度向下方僅移動i像 素邵分，雖然轉變成完全陰暗狀態，不過該子幀之上的 「G」像素則維持在稍亮狀態。存在此種應答緩慢的現象 時’圖12中與顯示白色之像素（「w」像素）鄰接的像素 上，以及在離開1像素的像素上產生著色。 爲防止因此種圖像顯示面板之應答緩慢所發生的掺色及 重像，在圖像顯示面板中進行子幀圖像的切換時，只須避 免被產生應答緩慢之圖像區域調變的光線投影在被投影面 上即可。因而，只須在產生應答緩慢的期間，例如使用液 晶光閘（Shutter)及機械光閘等遮光裝置，暫時遮蔽光程（自 光源至被投影面的光程）的一部分，或是暫時熄滅或減低 光源即可。 _ 不僅是圖像顯示面板應答緩慢的期間，就連圖像顯示面 板顯示時間與圖像移動時間不一致的期間也會發生同樣的 問題。因而，在發生此種時間不一致的期間，或是可能發 生時間不一致的期間，只須遮蔽光程即可。 另外，亦可改良圖9之圖像移動元件，賦予圖像移動元 件本身具備「遮光功能」，來取代上述使用的遮光裝置， 如圖13所示，於玻璃板20中之圖像顯示面板的應答緩=期 間及發生時間不一致期間，在橫切光束的部分配置遮光』 域21，即可抑制圖12之摻色及重像的發生，獲得更高品^ -36- 1227338 A7 ____B7 五、發明説明（34 ) 的圖像。扇型遮光區域21的中心角係因應圖像顯示面板之 應答緩慢的大小來決定。遮光區域2 1佔整個玻璃板2〇的比 率愈小，被投影面上顯示的圖像愈明亮。 自圖像開始移動至下一個圖像開始移動的期間，對圖像 顯示面板之應答從開始至結束之期間在時間軸上的關係， 亦即圖像移動期間的時間，宜如圖11所示的加以調整。亦 即’宜與圖像顯示面板之各像素區域顯示足夠亮度的期間 同步，進行圖像的移動。 本貫施形態的圖像顯示面板係使用绞絲狀（Twisted Nematic，TN)模式的液晶顯示面板，不過本發明並不限定 於此’亦可使用其他各種模式的液晶顯示面板。若採用可 更快速應答的顯示面板時，由於可以縮小設置在圖像移動 元件内之遮光區域的面積比率，因此可獲得更明亮、高品 質的圖像。 採用本實施形態之投影型圖像顯示裝置時，因在各幀期 間生成3個子幀圖像，使這些圖像作光學性的移動並合 成’所以比使用先前之彩色濾光器的單板式投影型圖像顯 示裝置，可大幅提高光使用率，且達到3倍的解像度。 另外’本實施形態係使用穿透型的顯示面板作爲圖像顯 示面板’不過亦可使用圖14所示之反射型的液晶顯示面 板。圖14所示的反射型液晶顯示面板揭示在特開平9-189809號公報内。使用此種反射型圖像顯示面板時，不需 要以分色鏡將自光源射出的白色光分光，顯示面板上之穿 透型全息將白色光繞射、分光成r，G及B光，並在對應之 -37- 本紙張尺度適用中@ g家標準(CNS) A4規格(21GX撕公爱) 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（36 ) ----- 且在該2f貞期間内，圖像移動僅產生4次。因而，可以減低 因圖像顯示面板之應答缓慢及圖像㈣時間不…致而造成 的畫質惡化。此外。鄰接像素以外無著色像素，發生著色 像素的子ΐ貞也比第1種實施形態減少3分之2，且不發 像。 /如此，於幀切換時，爲避免子幀圖像移動，各幀内之最 後子幅與下一悄之最初子鴨上，只須使圖像移動元件對光 束的作用處於相同條件，或停止圖像移動元件的移動即 可0 此種用於進行圖像移動之圖像移動元件的一種範例如圖 16所示。該圖像移動元件具備玻璃板22，其具有透明區域 Α〜F。透明區域E&amp;F由折射率149iFK5玻璃所形成，透 明區域A及D由折射率1·57之BaK4玻璃所形成，透明區域b 及C由折射率1·64之SF2玻璃所形成。各透明區域的厚度均 爲 2.0 mm。 將此種構造之圓盤狀玻璃板22的主面對光軸形成65。的 角度。並使各透明區域橫切光程的時間與切換成對應其之 子幢的時間同步來旋轉玻璃板22。藉此，透明區域a及〇 對透明區域E及F僅移動34.0#m光程，透明區域b及c對透 明區域A及D僅移動2 6.6 // m光程。 例如，透明區域F對應於圖15所示之第η幀的最初子幀。 此時，透明區域Α對應於第η幀的：F —個子幀，透明區域β 對應於第η幀的最後子幀。而透明區域c對應於第n+1幢的 取初子Φ貞’透明區域D對應於第n+1幀的下一個子中貞，透明 -39- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1227338 A71227338 A7 B7 5. The glass plate of the invention description (32) is rotated 9G toward the center of the optical axis. , The beam can be moved along the horizontal direction of the image. FIG. 11 shows the response curve of the light transmittance of the light portion (each pixel region) to the applied voltage in the π image display panel 8. Each pixel region of this embodiment has a structure in which the liquid crystal layer is sandwiched by electrodes. Since the response speed of the liquid crystal is limited, the light transmittance does not reach the maximum value at the instant when the voltage is applied. That is, when the light transmittance reaches the maximum level, the change from the dark state to the light-like resentment is completed, and the delay is started from the application of the voltage. In addition, there is also a time delay between the time when the stoppage is increased and the light transmission rate is minimized (zero). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), it is necessary to display different sub-frame images during each sub-frame period on the image display panel. If it is necessary to not ignore the time required for the sub-frame image to switch to full display, the sub-frame image brightness in the first part of each sub-frame period is insufficient. In addition, after the sub-frame period (voltage application period) ends, the sub-frame image is still Make unnecessary display temporarily. Therefore, even if the sub-frame image moves, the previous sub-frame image is displayed due to the slow response speed of the image display panel, or it is superimposed on the next sub-frame image, and only the previous sub-frame image is displayed. At this time, doping and ghosting (double writing) such as contours occur on the synthesized frame image. The cause of the above-mentioned doping and ghosting will be described below with reference to FIG. 12. The figure 2 model shows the specific pixel rows of the sub-frame image constituting the η (n is a positive integer) frame image, and the pixel rows corresponding to the sub-frame image constituting the η + 1-th frame image. Each pixel row is arranged up and down, and the optical path of the sub-frame image is moved up and down by the image moving element. In Figure 12, it is shown that the response of the image display panel is slow. Since _____- 35- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1227338 A7 _____ B7 V. Description of the invention (33) Pixels with a time delay that transitions from bright to dark. For example, in the first sub-frame image constituting the n-th frame image, the "b" pixels in the bright state are shifted downward by only one pixel in the next sub-frame, but have not yet completely turned into the dark state. In the next sub-frame, only the i-pixel pixel is moved downwards again. Although it is changed to a completely dark state, the "G" pixels above the sub-frame are maintained in a slightly bright state. When there is such a slow response phenomenon, in FIG. 12, coloration occurs on a pixel adjacent to a pixel that displays white ("w" pixel) and on a pixel away from one pixel. In order to prevent the color mixing and ghosting caused by the slow response of the image display panel, when switching the sub-frame image in the image display panel, it is only necessary to avoid being modulated by the light that produces the slow response image area. Just project on the projected surface. Therefore, it is only necessary to temporarily shield a part of the optical path (light path from the light source to the projected surface) during a period of slow response, such as using a light-shielding device such as a liquid crystal shutter (Shutter) and a mechanical shutter, or temporarily turn off or Just reduce the light source. _ The same problem occurs not only during periods when the image display panel responds slowly, but also during periods when the display time of the image display panel is not consistent with the image movement time. Therefore, it is only necessary to shield the optical path during such a time inconsistency or during a time inconsistency. In addition, the image moving element of FIG. 9 can be improved, and the image moving element itself can be provided with a “light-shielding function” instead of the light-shielding device used above. As shown in FIG. 13, the image display panel in the glass plate 20 Slow response = period and period of time of inconsistency, arrange light-shielding in the section of the cross-beam "field 21, you can suppress the occurrence of color mixing and ghosting in Figure 12, and obtain higher quality ^ -36- 1227338 A7 ____B7 V. Invention Illustration (34) of the image. The central angle of the fan-shaped light-shielding region 21 is determined in accordance with the slow response of the image display panel. The smaller the ratio of the light-shielding area 21 to the entire glass plate 20, the brighter the image displayed on the projected surface. From the time when the image starts moving to the time when the next image starts moving, the relationship between the response to the image display panel from the beginning to the end on the time axis, that is, the time during the image movement, should be as shown in Figure 11. To adjust. That is, it is desirable to move the image in synchronization with a period in which each pixel region of the image display panel displays sufficient brightness. The image display panel of the present embodiment is a liquid crystal display panel using a twisted-nematic (TN) mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other various modes of liquid crystal display panels may be used. When a display panel capable of quicker response is used, the area ratio of the light-shielding area provided in the image moving element can be reduced, so that a brighter, higher-quality image can be obtained. When the projection-type image display device of this embodiment is used, three sub-frame images are generated during each frame, and these images are optically moved and synthesized. Therefore, the projection image display device is more than a single-plate projection using a conventional color filter. Type image display device, which can greatly improve the light utilization rate and achieve 3 times the resolution. In addition, "this embodiment uses a transmissive display panel as an image display panel", but a reflective liquid crystal display panel shown in Fig. 14 may be used. A reflective liquid crystal display panel shown in FIG. 14 is disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-189809. When using such a reflective image display panel, it is not necessary to use a dichroic mirror to split the white light emitted from the light source. The transmissive hologram on the display panel diffracts and splits the white light into r, G, and B light, and In the corresponding -37- this paper standard is applicable @ g 家 standard (CNS) A4 specifications (21GX tear public love) 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (36) ----- During the 2f period, the figure The image movement is only generated 4 times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the image quality caused by the slow response of the image display panel and the time lag of the image. Also. There are no colored pixels other than adjacent pixels, and the number of children of colored pixels is reduced by two-thirds compared with the first embodiment, and no image is generated. / So, in order to avoid sub-frame image movement during frame switching, the last sub-frame in each frame and the first sub-duck in the next frame only need to make the effect of the image moving element on the light beam the same, or stop An image moving element can be moved. An example of such an image moving element for image movement is shown in FIG. 16. This image moving element includes a glass plate 22 having transparent areas A to F. The transparent areas E &amp; F are formed of 149iFK5 glass with a refractive index, the transparent areas A and D are formed of BaK4 glass with a refractive index of 1.57, and the transparent areas b and C are formed of SF2 glass with a refractive index of 1.64. The thickness of each transparent area is 2.0 mm. The optical axis of the main surface of the disc-shaped glass plate 22 having such a structure is 65. Angle. The glass plate 22 is rotated while synchronizing the time of the optical path length of each transparent region with the time of switching to the corresponding sub-block. As a result, transparent areas a and 0 move only 34.0 # m optical path to transparent areas E and F, and transparent areas b and c move only 2 6.6 // m optical path to transparent areas A and D. For example, the transparent area F corresponds to the first subframe of the n-th frame shown in FIG. 15. At this time, the transparent region A corresponds to the F-th subframe of the n-th frame, and the transparent region β corresponds to the last subframe of the n-th frame. The transparent area c corresponds to the n + 1's first child Φzhen '. The transparent area D corresponds to the next child Zhongzhen in the n + 1th frame. Transparent -39- This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications. (210 X 297 mm) 1227338 A7

區域E對應於第n+1幀的最後子幀。 因透明區域B與透明區域c具有相同的折射率及厚度，所 以光程的移動量也相同，如圖15所示，在對應之兩個子幀 圖像間不產生移動。同樣的，在透明區域E與透明區域 也不產生移動。 此處爲便於説明透明區域B&amp;c、以及透明區域e&amp;f，係 分別將其區分成兩個區域（圖16中以虛線區分），不過實際 上，可刀別以一塊連續的構件構成。因此，圖16之圓盤狀 玻璃板2 2可組合4個扇形透明構件來製作。 本貫施形態也因圖像顯示面板之應答緩慢等因素，而在 圖像移動與子幀切換之間發生時間不一致。因而，如圖j 7 所示’宜在玻璃板22的適切部分設置遮光區域2 1。圖17 中’在應該進行圖像移動的兩個區域邊界（透明區域A及d 的各兩側）設置遮光區域21即可。 本實施形態也使用TN模式的液晶顯示面板作爲圖像顯示 面板，不過，亦可使用其他各種模式的液晶顯示面板。若 採用可更快速應答的顯示面板時，由於可以縮小設置在圖 像移動元件内之遮光區域的面積比率，因此可獲得更明 亮、高品質的圖像。此外，本實施形態係使用穿透型顯示 面板作爲圖像顯示面板，不過亦可使用圖14所示的反射型 液晶顯示面板。 採用本實施形態之投影型圖像顯示裝置時，因使用無彩 色;慮光器的圖像顯示面板，在各巾貞期間生成3個子賴圖 像，使這些圖像作光學性的移動並合成，所以比使用先前 -40-本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1227338Region E corresponds to the last subframe of the n + 1th frame. Since the transparent region B and the transparent region c have the same refractive index and thickness, the movement amount of the optical path is also the same. As shown in FIG. 15, no movement occurs between the corresponding two sub-frame images. Similarly, no movement occurs in the transparent area E and the transparent area. Here, the transparent area B &amp; c and the transparent area e &amp; f are divided into two areas (denoted by dashed lines in Fig. 16) for the convenience of explanation, but in practice, the knife can be composed of a continuous member. Therefore, the disc-shaped glass plate 22 of Fig. 16 can be manufactured by combining four sector-shaped transparent members. In this embodiment, due to factors such as the slow response of the image display panel, time inconsistencies occur between image movement and sub-frame switching. Therefore, as shown in Fig. J7 ', it is desirable to provide a light-shielding area 21 at a suitable portion of the glass plate 22. In FIG. 17 ′, the light-shielding region 21 may be provided at the boundary of the two regions (on both sides of the transparent regions A and d) where the image should be moved. In this embodiment, a TN mode liquid crystal display panel is also used as the image display panel. However, other various modes of liquid crystal display panels may be used. When a display panel capable of quicker response is used, the area ratio of the light-shielding area provided in the image moving element can be reduced, so that a brighter, higher-quality image can be obtained. In this embodiment, a transmissive display panel is used as the image display panel, but a reflective liquid crystal display panel shown in Fig. 14 may be used. When the projection-type image display device of this embodiment is used, an achromatic image display panel is used to generate three sub-images during each frame period, and these images are optically moved and combined. Therefore, than the previous -40- this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1227338

&lt;彩色遽光器的單板式投影型圖像顯示裝置，可大幅提高 光使用率，且達到3倍的解像度。 此外，因幀切換時子幀圖像不移動，可大幅減低因上述 圖像顯示面板之應答緩慢等造成的摻色及重像。 (第3種實施形態） 其次，説明本發明的第3種實施形態。 本貫施形怨之投影型圖像顯示裝置基本上也具有與第1 種實施形態相同的構造，主要的差異在於子幀圖像的構成 及移動方法。以下説明其差異點。 如圖18所示，本實施形態之構成各幀圖像的子幀圖像數 爲2個’各子幀圖像依序顯示在-被投影面上之不同的兩個 位置上。因而，各幀係以第一子幀圖像之某1個像素與投 影在其附近之第二子幀圖像之2個像素的合計3個像素構成 被投影面上的1個像素。與被投影面上之上述1個像素鄰接 之其他1個像素與其相反，係合成第一子幀圖像之2個像素 與第二子幀之1個像素。藉此，形成在被投影面中之圖像 的解像度雖少許降低，然因可以2個子幀構成各帕，所以 不需要快速驅動圖像顯示面板，亦可減低因應答緩慢造成 的摻色。 本實施形態使用在被投影面上之兩個不同位置上使子幅 圖像顯示所構成的圖像移動元件。該圖像移動元件可由具 有折射率及厚度至少其中一項不同之兩種透明區域的玻璃 板所構成。 本實施形態雖也使用TN模式的液晶顯示面板作爲圖像顯 -41- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐）&lt; Single-plate projection image display device of color calender, which can greatly improve the light utilization rate and achieve 3 times the resolution. In addition, since the sub-frame image does not move during frame switching, the color mixing and ghosting caused by the slow response of the image display panel can be greatly reduced. (Third Embodiment) Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. The projection-type image display device of the present embodiment basically has the same structure as that of the first embodiment, and the main difference lies in the composition and movement method of the sub-frame image. The differences will be described below. As shown in FIG. 18, the number of sub-frame images constituting each frame image in this embodiment is two. Each sub-frame image is sequentially displayed at two different positions on the projected surface. Therefore, each frame constitutes one pixel on the projected surface by a total of three pixels of one pixel of the first sub-frame image and two pixels of the second sub-frame image projected in the vicinity. The other one pixel adjacent to the above-mentioned one pixel on the projected surface is the opposite, and the two pixels of the first sub-frame image and the one pixel of the second sub-frame are combined. As a result, although the resolution of the image formed on the projected surface is slightly reduced, since each sub-frame can be composed of two sub-frames, it is not necessary to quickly drive the image display panel, and the color mixing caused by the slow response can be reduced. This embodiment uses an image moving element configured to display a sub-frame image at two different positions on the surface to be projected. The image moving element may be composed of a glass plate having two transparent regions having at least one of a refractive index and a thickness different from each other. Although this embodiment also uses a TN mode liquid crystal display panel as an image display -41- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

1227338 A7 ____ B7 五、發明説明（：39~--- 示面板，不過亦可使用其他各種模式的液晶顯示面板。若 採用可更快速應答的顯示面板時，由於可以縮小設置在圖 像移動7G件内之遮光區域的面積比率，因此可獲得更明 亮、高品質的圖像。此外，本實施形態係使用穿透型顯示 面板作爲圖像顯示面板，不過亦可使用圖14所示的反射型 液晶顯示面板。 採用本實施形態之投影型圖像顯示裝置時，因使用無彩 色濾光器的圖像顯7F面板，在各幀期間生成2個子幀圖 像，使這些圖像作光學性的移動並合成，所以比使用先前 之彩色濾光器的單板式投影型圖像顯示裝置，可大幅提高 光使用率，且達到更高的解像度。 (第4種實施形態） 其次，説明本發明的第4種實施形態。 本實施形態之投影型圖像顯示裝置基本上也具有與第i 種實施形態相同的構造，主要的差異在於子幀圖像的構成 及移動方法。以下説明其差異點。 如圖19所示’本實施形態之構成各幀圖像的子幀圖像數 爲2個’各子幀圖像依序顯示在被投影面上之不同的三個 位置上。因各幀可以2個子幀構成，所以不需要快速驅動 圖像顯示面板，亦可減低因應答緩慢造成的摻色。 如圖19所示，本實施形態之構成各幀圖像的子幀圖像數 雖爲2個’但是因各子幀圖像係依序顯示在被投影面上不 同的三個位置上，所以圖像移動週期爲幀期間的1 ·5倍。 以致在被投影面上的各像素中，r，G及B的像素資訊被重 _____ -42- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(21〇χ297公釐) 1227338 A7 ______B7 五、發明説明（4〇 ) © ’所以可以獲得比第3種實施形態更高解像度的圖像。 本實施形態的2個子幀圖像雖係分別對應於構成影像信 號之原圖幀的子幀，不過不需要與構成影像信號之原圖幀 的子幀在各顯示子幀的顯示時間上完全一致。於構成影像 信號之原圖幀之最後子幀的顯示尚未結束，卻成爲下一個 子巾貞的顯不時間時’只須放菜保留之原圖巾貞的影像信號， 而顯示新構成的原圖幀之最初子幀即可。一般的影像由於 在幀間或子幀間，圖像資訊不致產生大的變化，因此，縱 使在顯示幀的頻率與原圖幀頻率之間存在差異，仍可進行 無不適感的顯示。因此，本實施形態對顯示品質並無重大 損害，可簡化裝置的構造。 另外，與第3種實施形態不同，因本實施形態之圖像移 動元件係將子幀圖像顯示在被投影面上的三個不同位置 上，所以直接使用第1種實施形態所採用之圖像移動元 件，將其旋轉速度減低至3分之2即可。 本實施形態雖也使用TN模式的液晶顯示面板作爲圖像顯 示面板，不過亦可使用其他各種模式的液晶顯示面板。若 採用可更快速應答的顯示面板時，由於可以縮小設置在圖 像移動元件内之遮光區域的面積比率，因此可獲得更明 亮、高品質的圖像。此外，本實施形態係使用穿透型顯示 面板作爲圖像顯示面板，不過亦可使用圖14所示的反射型 液晶顯示面板。 - 採用本實施形態之投影型圖像顯示裝置時，因使用無彩 色濾光器的圖像顯示面板，在各幀期間生成2個子幀圖 -43- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 1227338 A7 ____ B7 五、發明説明（41 ) 像，使這些圖像作光學性的移動並合成，所以比使用先前 I形色濾光器的單板式投影型圖像顯示裝置，可大幅提高 光使用率，且達到更高的解像度。 (第5種實施形態） 其次’説明本發明的第5種實施形態。 本實施形態之投影型圖像顯示裝置基本上也具有與第} 種實施形態相同的構造，主要的差異在於子幀圖像的構成 及移動方法。以下説明其差異點。 本實施形態之構成各幀圖像的子幀圖像數爲4個，各子 幀圖像依序顯示在被投影面上之不同的三個位置上，構成 各幀圖像之4個子幀圖像中的2個子幀圖像顯示在被投影面 上的同一個位置上。亦即，本實施形態之子幀在與第i種 實施形態同樣生成的子幀資料中，將各幀内之第2個子幀 於最後再度顯示，由合計4個子幀構成各幀圖像。 以下參照圖20詳細説明這一點。 本實施形態之圖像移動概略以丨個像素間距進行，以各 幀内之第二及第四子幀圖像爲基準，分別使第一及第三子 幀圖像向上及向下移動。亦即，各幀由4個子幀所構成， 藉由4次的圖像移動來進行1週期的移動。 由於本實施形態係以幀單位作週期，進行圖像的往返運 動，因此可以始終以1個像素單位使圖像向三個不同位置 移動。因而，縱使在幀内，或在幀間，由於可以始終以^ 個像素單位進行圖像的移動，因此可以防止圖20所示之重 像的發生。 -44-1227338 A7 ____ B7 V. Description of the invention (: 39 ~ --- display panel, but other various modes of liquid crystal display panel can also be used. If a display panel that can respond faster is used, it can be reduced to set the image shift 7G The area ratio of the light-shielding area inside the device allows a brighter, high-quality image to be obtained. In addition, this embodiment uses a transmissive display panel as the image display panel, but a reflective type as shown in FIG. 14 may also be used. Liquid crystal display panel. When the projection type image display device of this embodiment is used, an image display 7F panel with no color filter is used to generate two sub-frame images during each frame period, and these images are made optically. Moving and synthesizing, compared with the single-plate projection image display device using the conventional color filter, the light utilization rate can be greatly improved and the resolution can be higher. (Fourth Embodiment) Next, the present invention will be described. The fourth embodiment. The projection-type image display device of this embodiment also basically has the same structure as the i-th embodiment, and the main difference lies in the sub-frame image. Structure and moving method. The differences are described below. As shown in FIG. 19, “the number of sub-frame images constituting each frame image in this embodiment is two.” Each sub-frame image is sequentially displayed on the projection surface. In three different positions. Because each frame can be composed of 2 sub-frames, it is not necessary to quickly drive the image display panel, and it can also reduce the color mixing caused by the slow response. As shown in FIG. 19, the frames of this embodiment form each frame. Although the number of sub-frame images of the image is two, each sub-frame image is sequentially displayed at three different positions on the projection surface, so the image movement period is 1.5 times as long as the frame period. As a result, among the pixels on the projected surface, the pixel information of r, G, and B is weighted _____ -42- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇χ297 mm) 1227338 A7 ______B7 V. Description of the invention (4〇) © 'Therefore, an image with higher resolution than the third embodiment can be obtained. Although the two sub-frame images in this embodiment correspond to the sub-frames of the original picture frame constituting the video signal, however, It does not need to be in the same sub-frame as the original frame of the video signal. The display time of each display sub-frame is completely the same. When the display of the last sub-frame of the original picture frame constituting the image signal has not ended, but it becomes the display time of the next sub-frame, the original picture towel that only needs to be kept It is only necessary to display the first sub-frame of the newly-formed original image frame in the normal image signal. Because the image information does not change greatly between frames or between sub-frames, even if the frequency of the display frame and the There is a difference between the frame frequencies of the original image, and it is still possible to display without discomfort. Therefore, this embodiment does not significantly damage the display quality and can simplify the structure of the device. In addition, unlike the third embodiment, this embodiment The image moving element of the form displays the sub-frame image at three different positions on the projected surface, so the image moving element used in the first embodiment is used directly to reduce its rotation speed to one third. 2 is enough. Although a liquid crystal display panel of the TN mode is also used as the image display panel in this embodiment, liquid crystal display panels of other various modes may be used. When a display panel capable of quicker response is used, the area ratio of the light-shielding area provided in the image moving element can be reduced, so that a brighter, higher-quality image can be obtained. In this embodiment, a transmissive display panel is used as the image display panel, but a reflective liquid crystal display panel shown in Fig. 14 may be used. -When the projection type image display device of this embodiment is adopted, an image display panel without color filters is used to generate two sub-frames in each frame period. -43- This paper standard applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210X 297 mm) 1227338 A7 ____ B7 V. Description of the invention (41) These images are optically moved and combined, so they are better than the single-plate projection image display using the previous I-shaped color filter Device, which can greatly increase the light utilization rate and achieve higher resolution. (Fifth Embodiment) Next, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The projection type image display device of this embodiment basically has the same structure as that of the second embodiment. The main difference is the configuration and movement method of the sub-frame image. The differences will be described below. The number of sub-frame images constituting each frame image in this embodiment is 4. Each sub-frame image is sequentially displayed at three different positions on the projected surface, and constitutes 4 sub-frame images of each frame image. The two sub-frame images in the image are displayed at the same position on the projection surface. That is, in the subframe data generated in the same manner as the i-th embodiment, the subframe in this embodiment displays the second subframe in each frame at the end again, and each frame image is composed of a total of 4 subframes. This will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 20. The image movement in this embodiment is roughly carried out at a pixel pitch, and the first and third sub-frame images are moved upward and downward, respectively, based on the second and fourth sub-frame images in each frame. That is, each frame is composed of four sub-frames, and one cycle of movement is performed by four image movements. In this embodiment, the image is reciprocated on a frame unit cycle, so the image can always be moved to three different positions in one pixel unit. Therefore, even within a frame or between frames, since the image can be always moved in units of ^ pixels, it is possible to prevent the ghosting shown in FIG. 20 from occurring. -44-

12273381227338

、如圖21所示，將第四顯示子幢顯示黑色時，因各轉内 (各顏色的顯示次數不等，因此像素間的顏色均衡良好。 各悄也可由5個以上的子t貞圖像構成。此時，宜使進行 黑色顯示之數個子_像分散在各㈣，使各色的顯示次 數在各幀内相同。 、因而L顯示在被投影面上之同一位置上的2個子幀圖像 亦可由亮度被減低的子幀圖像所構成，來取代將黑色顯示 之子幀***各幀内。具體而言，亦可校正顯示圖像信號， 使各幀之第二及第四子幀圖像的合計光量與第一或第三子 幀圖像的光量相等。如此，因各像素間的顏色均衡良好， 且始終顯示有像素，所以閃爍感亦減低。此種顯示圖像信 號的校正量由於在整個像素、及各幀中始終爲相同的校 正，因此可以構成簡單的電路。 本實施形態所使用之圖像移動元件，如圖22所示，係由 具有4個透明區域的玻璃板23所構成。透明區域a由折射率 1·49之FK5玻璃所形成，透明區域b及〇由折射率1.57之 BaK4玻璃所形成，透明區域c由折射率ι·64之SF2玻璃所形 成。透明區域Α〜D的厚度均爲2.0 mm。玻璃板23橫切光 程，使其主面對光軸形成65°的角度，透明區域A〜D分別 對應於子幘圖像旋轉。因而，對透明區域B及D，透明區 域A上，光束僅向上移動34.0// m，透明區域C上，光束僅 移動 26.6^111。 - 本實施形態雖也使用TN模式的液晶顯示面板作爲圖像顯 示面板，不過亦可使用其他各種模式的液晶顯示面板。若 -45- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 1227338 A7 _ B7 五、發明説明（43 ) 採用可更快速應答的顯示面板時，由於可以縮小設置在圖 像移動元件内之遮光區域的面積比率，因此可獲得更明 亮、高品質的圖像。此外，本實施形態係使用穿透型顯示 面板作爲圖像顯示面板，不過亦可使用圖14所示的反射型 液晶顯示面板。 採用本實施形態之投影型圖像顯示裝置時，因使用無彩 色濾光声的圖像顯示面板，在各幀期間生成4個子幀圖 像，使這些圖像作光學性的移動並合成，所以比使用先前 足彩色濾光器的單板式投影型圖像顯示裝置，可大幅提高 光使用率，且達到3倍的解像度。 因而，本發明之投影型圖像顯示裝置，藉由將各幀圖像 分時成數個子幀圖像，使這些子幀圖像移動且重疊，來合 成原來的幀圖像。使子幀圖像移動的時間宜與圖像顯示面 板上切換子幀圖像的時間同步。 切換子幀圖像的方式大致上有兩種。第一種方式爲「線 掃瞄（Line掃瞄）方式」，該方式係在圖像顯示面板中，每 一列或數列驅動排列成行列狀的數個像素區域，自畫面的 上部向下部垂直顯示新的子幀圖像。將畫面區分成數塊， 掃瞄各列的方法也屬於「線掃瞄方式」。此外，第二種方 式爲「面（統一）寫入方式」，該方式係在圖像顯示面板 中，統一驅動排列成行列狀之全部的數個像素區域，在整 個畫面上同時顯示新的子傾圖像。_ 本發明不受掃瞄方式之種類的限制。以下，首先說明 「線掃瞄方式」的實施形態。 -46- 1227338 五、發明説明（44 ) (第6種實施形態） 圖23(a)〜（g)顯示在圖像顯&amp; M琢鴻不面板中，以線掃瞄進行子幀 圖像切換的情況。圖23〇)鞀千椹鹿-工&gt; μ 、、人肩π僅顯不面板第一列之像素區 域被切換顯示成新子幢圖傻（ _ ^ 口诼（如罘一子幀圖像）的狀態。此 寺第歹J以後之像素區域持續顯示舊子悄圖像（如第一 子帕圖像）。圖23(b)〜（g)爲掃瞒線逐列向畫面下方移動， 新子幀圖像的顯示區域逐漸攄 、 所叛大。圖23(g)在第丨〜7列的像 素區域上顯示有新的子幢圖像。 因而，以一般線掃瞒驅冑的圖像顯示面板藉由子幢圖像 的切換，新子幀圖像與舊子幀圖像的邊界線在每一個水平 (1H)期間和動。此時，圖J J之開始施加電壓的時間，在各 掃瞄線（列）分離一定間隔。 因此，使用線掃瞄驅動的圖像顯示面板時，各像素宜使 開始新子幢圖像顯示的時間與圖像移動元件開始光程移動 的時間同步。因而宜使新子帽圖像之顯示區域增加的速度 (掃瞄線移動速度）與圖像移動元件之移動區域增加的速度 —致〇 •i 以下説明適用於此種操作之圖像移動元件的各種態樣。 如圖24所示，本實施形態之圖像移動元件由具有6個透 明區域的玻璃板24所構成。透明區域八及〇由折射率丨的之 FK5玻璃所形成，透明區域3及£由折射率丨^之以以玻璃 所形成，透明區域C&amp;F由折射率丄64之31：2玻璃所形成。 其厚度統一爲2.0 mm ° 藉由***該圖像移動元件，使玻璃板24的主面對光軸形 -47- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐） 1227338 A7 _______B7 五、發明説明（45~) — --- 成65。的角度，對透明區域八及〇，透明區域6及£僅移動 34.0vm，透明區域C&amp;F僅移動26 6 &quot;m。各透明區域分別 對應於顯示子幀。本圖像移動元件因玻璃板24的厚度一 定，所以縱使在高速下，仍然安靜、穩定的旋轉。 另外，爲求抑制上述實施形態中説明知因圖像顯示面板 應答緩慢造成的摻色，宜如圖25所示的，在各透明區域之 間設置遮光區域21。 此外，與圖9之玻璃板20同樣的，亦可僅使用廉價的βΚ7 玻璃作爲玻璃材料。此時，因各透明區域的厚度可以自由 選擇’所以可以廉價獲得更高精度的圖像移動元件。 上述圖像移動元件的改良例爲，將透明區域八及〇由玻璃 板24的缺口部構成，其餘透明區域亦可使用折射率1.52之 BK7玻璃。此時’透明區域b及e的厚度設定在〇·7 mm，透 明區域C及F的厚度設定在1 ·4 mm，***圖像移動元件，使 玻璃板24的主面對光軸形成83·8。的角度時，透明區域B， E對透明區域A，D可達到26.0 a m的圖像移動，透明區域c， F對透明區域B，E亦可達到26.0 // m的圖像移動。採用此種 構造可使圖像移動元件輕量化。此外，因對應於透明區域 A及D的子ψ貞圖像不穿透玻璃，因此，也發揮鮮明化的效 果。 其他圖像移動元件由具有6個透明區域之玻璃板24的構 成亦可採如下的方式。亦即，透明區域A及D由折射率1.49 之FK5玻璃所形成，其厚度爲2.0 mm。透明區域B及E由折 射率1.52之BK7玻璃所形成，其厚度爲2.09 mm。透明區域 -48- 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（46 ) C及F由折射率丨.64之SF2玻璃所形成，其厚度爲2〇mm。 此時，***該玻璃板，使對光軸形成65。的角度時，透明 區域ME對透明區域歧0可達到9 像移動，透 明區域C及F對透明區域B&amp;e可達到％ m的圖像移動。 如此，藉由選擇較容易量產的玻璃板，調整其厚度，使透 明區域間之厚度差異較小，可以廉價製造更高精度的圖像 移動元件。 另外，上述圖像移動元件的主要部分雖由均以玻璃材料 所形成的透明板所構成，不過本發明之圖像移動元件並不 限疋於此。亦可爲形成光程折射的透明材料，或塑膠等樹 脂。 如以上説明’爲求使用對於光㈣斜的透明板，使子轉 圖像的光程移動，只須製作具有折射率及厚度其中至少 項不同之數個透明區域的透明板即可。透日月板的厚度便於 以表面研磨及姓刻等技術作調整。 使透明板之主面對裝軸傾斜45〜85。的角度時，從折射 率1.45〜1.7的範圍内選擇適切値，即可達到必要的圖像移 動量。由於具有此種折射率的透明板可以一般玻璃材料來 形成，因此可以廉價製造圖像移動元件。 使透明板之主面對裝軸傾斜66〜88。的角度時，在 0.5〜2.0 mm的範圍内選擇透明板厚度的適切値，&amp;即可達到 必要的圖像移動量。此外，使透.明板之主面對裝轴傾斜 6卜80°的角度時’在〇.5〜2.〇mm的範圍内選擇透明板厚 度的適切値’在1.45M.7的範圍内選擇折射率的適切値= -49- 本紙張尺度適用中國國豕標準(CNS) A4規格(21〇X297公爱） 1227338 A7 ____— B7 五、發明説明（47 ) 即可達到必要的圖像移動量。 (第7種實施形態） 在畫面的垂直方向進行線掃瞄時，如圖26所示，第η子 幀圖像與第η+1子幀圖像的邊界部（圖像切換的邊界），以水 平線邵分來表示’該線部分從上向下移動。 使用上述旋轉板執行圖像移動時，同樣如圖26所示，在 玻璃板24中，因鄰接之透明區域的邊界線（圖像移動區域 的邊界）以1點作中心旋轉，所以有時該邊界線與子幀圖像 之切換郅彼此不平行，而出現偏差。發生此種偏差時，應 該被移動之子幀圖像的一部分未確實移動，而不應該被移 動之舊子幀圖像的一部分反而被—移動。 爲求消除此種弊端，如第1種實施形態中的説明，亦可 使用各種方法，僅在發生上述時間偏差的期間避免圖像顯 示面板的光線投射在被投影面上。 本貫施开〉怨爲消除上述弊端，係採用具有如圖27所示之 3個透明區域的玻璃板25構成圖像移動元件，來取代設置 遮光部分，以驅動裝置使該玻璃板25在上下方向往返移 動，藉此達到圖像的移動。 本貫&amp;开^態中，玻璃板25的透明區域Α由折射率1.49之 FK5玻璃所形成，透明區域B由折射率1.57之BaK4玻璃所 形成，透明區域C由折射率^4之SF2玻璃所形成，各透明 區域的厚度均爲2.0 mm。將此種玻璃板24***光程中，使 其王面對光軸形成65°的角度時，透明區域B對透明區域a 進行34·〇 a m的圖像移動，透明區域c對透明區域b進行 ___ -50- 本紙張尺度適用巾@國家標準(cns) Μ規格⑽ X 297公釐） 1227338 A7 _ _ B7 五、發明説明（48 ) 26.6&quot; m的圖像移動。 採用本實施形態時，玻璃板25中，可以使鄰接之透明區 域的邊界位置（圖像移動區域的邊界）與圖像切換的邊界一 致。因而，由於任何顯示新子幀圖像資訊的像素均以適切 的時間移動，所以可獲得摻色更少的圖像。 另外，縱使使用本實施形態之圖像移動元件時，仍可能 因圖像顯示面板應答緩慢而發生摻色等問題。此時，宜在 圖27所示之各透明區域a〜C的邊界部設置遮光區域（圖上未 顯示）。 採用本實施形態時，圖像顯示面板之掃瞄線與數個透明 區域之邊界線概略保持平行，並與圖像的切換同步進行圖 像移動。爲求達到此種圖像移動，本實施形態係使如圖27 所示的玻璃板25往返，不過，各透明區域的邊界線若能與 圖像顯示面板的掃瞄線保持平行關係，亦可使用其他手 段。例如，以其他玻璃板26形成圖27所示的透明區域 A〜C，以圖28所示之驅動裝置來驅動這些玻璃板27即可。 採用此種驅動方式可使數個透明區域之邊界線與圖像顯示 面板的掃瞄線保持概略平行的關係，使其與線掃瞄同步移 動。此外，縱使將相當於透明區域A〜C的透明板配置在相 同光程上，使其交錯旋轉依序到達光程上，亦可達到同樣 的效果。 (第8種實施形態） _ 其次，參照圖29〜圖3 1，説明圖像移動元件的其他實施 形態。本實施形態之圖像移動元件由設計成在被投影面上 -51· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1227338 A7 _ B7 五、發明説明（49 ) 之移動量不同的數個微小棱鏡或繞射光柵等構成，藉由該 圖像移動元件進出光程上來進行圖像移動。 首先參照圖29。 本實施形態，由折射率η 1之玻璃所形成之微小棱鏡板的 棱鏡面被折射率η2的樹脂材料覆蓋。對該微小棱鏡板之非 稜鏡面（平滑面）垂直射入的光線，以角度Θ !改變光程時， 被投影面上僅1像素部分的圖像移動。再者，假設圖像顯 示面板8上之圖像區域的間距爲p，圖像顯示面板$之像素 區域面與棱鏡面（折射面）的距離爲Z。本實施形態係使$ i 二taiT^P/Z)來設計微小稜鏡板的構造。 本實施形態係使用FK5玻璃作爲微小棱鏡板的材料，棱 鏡面的表面使用LOCKTIGHT公司的LOCKTIGHT 363作爲 UV硬化樹脂，進行稜鏡面的調平。 假設像素區域的間距P爲26 A m，距離Z爲5 mm，微小棱 鏡的傾斜角爲P 2(=光線射入微小棱鏡傾斜面的射入角）， 經微小稜鏡折射後之光線的射出角爲Θ 3時，依據上述公 式，θ 1 爲 0.3° 。 此時，由於玻璃的折射率爲nl，樹脂的折射率爲“，因 此，Θ 2與Θ 3的關係依據斯律⑺耳定d· 3 = η2 · si^ ， 且具有的關係。因而，若1；]^5玻璃的折射率爲 1.487，LOCKTIGHT 363的折射率爲152〇，微小稜鏡之傾 斜角Θ 2爲13.7。時，則可以獲得相當於間距p的移動量。、 另外，若選擇各種參數以滿足上述公式時，則不限定於 本實施形態的材料及數値。此外，並非必須以樹脂來調平 -52-As shown in FIG. 21, when the fourth display sub-block is displayed in black, the color balance between the pixels is good because each rotation (the number of display times of each color varies). Each of the sub-frames can also be represented by 5 or more sub-frames. At this time, it is suitable to disperse several sub-images for black display in each frame so that the number of display times of each color is the same in each frame. Therefore, L is displayed in the two sub-frames at the same position on the projected surface. The image can also be composed of sub-frame images with reduced brightness, instead of inserting sub-frames displayed in black into each frame. Specifically, the display image signal can also be corrected to make the second and fourth sub-frame images of each frame The total light amount of the image is equal to the light amount of the first or third sub-frame image. In this way, the color balance between the pixels is good, and the pixels are always displayed, so the flickering feeling is also reduced. The amount of correction for this display image signal Since the same correction is always applied to the entire pixel and each frame, a simple circuit can be constructed. As shown in FIG. 22, the image moving element used in this embodiment is a glass plate 23 having four transparent areas. Made up. The bright area a is formed of FK5 glass with a refractive index of 1.49, the transparent areas b and 0 are formed of BaK4 glass with a refractive index of 1.57, and the transparent area c is formed of SF2 glass with a refractive index of ι · 64. The transparent areas A to D The thickness is 2.0 mm. The glass plate 23 crosses the optical path so that its main surface forms an angle of 65 ° with the optical axis. The transparent areas A to D correspond to the rotation of the sub-images. Therefore, the transparent areas B and D On the transparent area A, the light beam only moves upward by 34.0 // m, and on the transparent area C, the light beam moves only 26.6 ^ 111.-Although this embodiment also uses a TN mode liquid crystal display panel as the image display panel, it can also be used. Liquid crystal display panels in various other modes. If -45- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) 1227338 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (43) When a display panel capable of quicker response is used, Since the area ratio of the light-shielding area provided in the image moving element can be reduced, a brighter, high-quality image can be obtained. In addition, this embodiment uses a transmissive display panel as the image display panel. The reflection type liquid crystal display panel shown in Fig. 14 can be used. When the projection type image display device of this embodiment is used, an image display panel without color filter sound is used to generate four sub-frame images during each frame period. These images are optically moved and combined, so that compared with the single-plate projection image display device using the conventional color filter, the light utilization rate can be greatly improved and the resolution can be tripled. Therefore, the present invention The projection type image display device divides each frame image into a plurality of sub-frame images in a time-sharing manner, and moves and overlaps the sub-frame images to synthesize the original frame image. The time for moving the sub-frame image should be equal to that of the sub-frame image. Time synchronization of switching sub-frame images on the image display panel. There are roughly two ways to switch sub-frame images. The first method is the "Line Scan" method. This method is based on the image display panel. Each column or column drives several pixel areas arranged in rows and columns. It is displayed vertically from the top to the bottom of the screen. New sub-frame image. The screen is divided into several blocks, and the method of scanning each row also belongs to the "line scanning method". In addition, the second method is the "surface (uniform) writing method". This method is to uniformly drive all of the pixel areas arranged in rows and columns in the image display panel, and simultaneously display new sub-pixels on the entire screen. Tilt the image. _ The invention is not limited by the type of scanning method. The following first describes the implementation of the "line scanning method". -46- 1227338 V. Description of the invention (44) (sixth embodiment) Figs. 23 (a) to (g) are displayed on the image display & M panel, and the sub-frame image is scanned by line scanning. Switching situation. (Figure 23〇) 鼗 千 椹 鹿-工 &gt; μ, and human shoulder π only display the pixel area of the first column of the display panel is switched to display the new sub-block diagram silly (_ ^ 口 诼 (such as a sub-frame image ). The pixel area after this temple continues to display the old sub-clip image (such as the first sub-pa image). Figures 23 (b) ~ (g) move the column below the screen line by line, The display area of the new sub-frame image is gradually enlarged and rebellious. Fig. 23 (g) shows the new sub-frame image on the pixel area of the first to seventh columns. Therefore, the drive-by image is hidden from the general line. The image display panel switches between sub-frame images, and the boundary between the new sub-frame image and the old sub-frame image is adjusted at each level (1H). At this time, the time at which the voltage is applied in Figure JJ starts at each The scanning lines (columns) are separated by a certain interval. Therefore, when using an image display panel driven by line scanning, each pixel should synchronize the time when the image display of a new sub-block is started with the time when the image moving element starts the optical path movement. Therefore, it is appropriate to increase the speed of the display area of the new sub-cap image (scanning line moving speed) and the movement of the image moving element. Speed of field increase—to 〇 • i The following describes various aspects of the image moving element suitable for this kind of operation. As shown in FIG. 24, the image moving element of this embodiment is a glass plate 24 having 6 transparent areas. The transparent area VIII and 0 are formed by FK5 glass with a refractive index 丨, the transparent area 3 and £ are formed with glass with a refractive index 丨 ^, and the transparent area C &amp; F is formed with a refractive index 丄 64 of 31: 2 It is made of glass. Its thickness is uniformly 2.0 mm. By inserting the image moving element, the main surface of the glass plate 24 is shaped as an optical axis. -47- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297mm) (%) 1227338 A7 _______B7 V. Description of the invention (45 ~) — --- At an angle of 65 °, the transparent area is 8 and 0, the transparent area 6 and £ are only moved by 34.0vm, and the transparent area C &amp; F is only moved by 26 6 & quot m. Each transparent area corresponds to a display sub-frame. Because the thickness of the glass plate 24 is constant in this image moving element, it can still rotate quietly and stably even at high speed. In addition, in order to suppress the description in the above embodiment, Because the image display panel should The color mixing caused by the slowness, as shown in FIG. 25, is preferably provided with a light-shielding region 21 between the transparent regions. In addition, similar to the glass plate 20 of FIG. 9, only inexpensive βκ7 glass can be used as the glass material In this case, since the thickness of each transparent region can be freely selected, a more accurate image moving element can be obtained at a low cost. The improved example of the image moving element is that the transparent regions 8 and 0 are formed by the cutout portions of the glass plate 24. BK7 glass with a refractive index of 1.52 can also be used for other transparent areas. At this time, the thicknesses of the transparent areas b and e are set to 0.7 mm, and the thicknesses of the transparent areas C and F are set to 1. 4 mm. The optical axis of the main surface of the glass plate 24 was 83 · 8. When the angle is 0, the transparent area B, E can move to 26.0 a m with respect to the transparent area A, D, and the transparent area c, F can also move with 26.0 // m to the transparent area B, E. With this structure, the image moving element can be made lighter. In addition, since the sub-pictures corresponding to the transparent areas A and D do not penetrate the glass, a sharpening effect is also exhibited. The other image moving element is constituted by a glass plate 24 having six transparent regions, and the following method may be adopted. That is, the transparent regions A and D are formed of FK5 glass having a refractive index of 1.49 and have a thickness of 2.0 mm. The transparent areas B and E are formed of BK7 glass having a refractive index of 1.52 and have a thickness of 2.09 mm. Transparent area -48- 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (46) C and F are formed by SF2 glass with refractive index 丨 .64, and its thickness is 20mm. At this time, the glass plate was inserted so that the optical axis formed 65. When the angle is 0, the transparent area ME can achieve 9-image movement to the transparent area, and the transparent areas C and F can achieve% m image movement to the transparent area B &amp; e. In this way, by selecting a glass plate that is easier to mass-produce and adjusting its thickness so that the thickness difference between transparent areas is small, a more accurate image moving element can be manufactured at a low cost. In addition, although the main part of the image moving element is composed of a transparent plate formed of a glass material, the image moving element of the present invention is not limited to this. It can also be a transparent material that forms optical path refraction, or a resin such as plastic. As described above, in order to use a transparent plate that is oblique to light and move the optical path of the sub-transformed image, it is only necessary to make a transparent plate that has at least several transparent regions with different refractive indices and thicknesses. The thickness of the translucent sun plate is easy to adjust by surface grinding and engraving techniques. The main surface of the transparent plate is tilted by 45 to 85. When the angle of the lens is at a suitable angle, you can select the appropriate value from the range of refractive index 1.45 ~ 1.7 to achieve the necessary image movement. Since a transparent plate having such a refractive index can be formed of a general glass material, an image moving element can be manufactured at low cost. Tilt the main face of the transparent plate to the mounting axis by 66 ~ 88. In the range of 0.5 to 2.0 mm, the appropriate thickness of the transparent plate is selected, and the necessary image movement amount can be achieved. In addition, when the main surface of the transparent plate is tilted at an angle of 6 ° to 80 °, the thickness of the transparent plate is selected within the range of 0.5 to 2.0 mm. The range is 1.45M.7. Select the appropriate index of the refractive index-= -49- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇X297 public love) 1227338 A7 ____ — B7 V. Description of the invention (47) The necessary image movement can be achieved the amount. (Seventh Embodiment) When a line scan is performed in the vertical direction of the screen, as shown in FIG. 26, the boundary portion between the n-th sub-frame image and the η + 1-th sub-frame image (the boundary of image switching), The horizontal line is divided into points to indicate that the line part moves from top to bottom. When the image rotation is performed using the rotation plate, as shown in FIG. 26, in the glass plate 24, the boundary line of the adjacent transparent area (the boundary of the image movement area) is rotated around one point. The boundary line and the switching of the sub-frame image are not parallel to each other, and deviation occurs. When such a deviation occurs, a part of the sub-frame image that should be moved is not actually moved, and a part of the old sub-frame image that should not be moved is instead-moved. In order to eliminate such disadvantages, as described in the first embodiment, various methods can be used to prevent the light of the image display panel from being projected on the surface to be projected only during the time deviation described above. In order to eliminate the above-mentioned disadvantages, a glass plate 25 having three transparent areas as shown in FIG. 27 is used to constitute an image moving element instead of providing a light shielding portion to drive the device to make the glass plate 25 up and down. The direction moves back and forth, thereby moving the image. In this &amp; open state, the transparent region A of the glass plate 25 is formed by FK5 glass with a refractive index of 1.49, the transparent region B is formed by BaK4 glass with a refractive index of 1.57, and the transparent region C is formed by an SF2 glass with a refractive index of 4. The thickness of each transparent area is 2.0 mm. When such a glass plate 24 is inserted in the optical path so that the king faces the optical axis at an angle of 65 °, the transparent area B moves the image of the transparent area a by 34.0am, and the transparent area c performs the transparent area b. ___ -50- This paper size is suitable for towels @National Standard (cns) M size ⑽ X 297 mm) 1227338 A7 _ _ B7 V. Description of the invention (48) 26.6 &quot; m image movement. In this embodiment, in the glass plate 25, the boundary position of the adjacent transparent region (the boundary of the image moving region) and the boundary of the image switching can be matched. Therefore, since any pixel displaying image information of a new sub-frame is moved at an appropriate time, an image with less color mixing can be obtained. In addition, even when the image moving element of this embodiment is used, problems such as color mixing may occur due to the slow response of the image display panel. In this case, a light-shielding region (not shown in the figure) should be provided at the boundary portion of each of the transparent regions a to C shown in FIG. 27. In this embodiment, the scanning line of the image display panel and the boundary lines of a plurality of transparent regions are roughly parallel, and the image is moved in synchronization with the switching of the image. In order to achieve this kind of image movement, the present embodiment is to make the glass plate 25 as shown in FIG. 27 reciprocate. However, if the boundary line of each transparent area can maintain a parallel relationship with the scanning line of the image display panel, Use other means. For example, the transparent regions A to C shown in FIG. 27 may be formed by other glass plates 26, and these glass plates 27 may be driven by a driving device shown in FIG. 28. By adopting this driving method, the boundary lines of several transparent areas and the scanning lines of the image display panel can be maintained in a substantially parallel relationship, so that they can move synchronously with the line scanning. In addition, the same effect can be achieved even if the transparent plates corresponding to the transparent areas A to C are arranged on the same optical path, and the staggered rotations sequentially reach the optical path. (Eighth Embodiment) Next, another embodiment of the image moving element will be described with reference to Figs. 29 to 31. The image moving element of this embodiment is designed to be on the surface to be projected. -51 · This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1227338 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (49) It consists of a plurality of micro prisms or diffraction gratings with different movement amounts, and the image movement is performed by the image movement element in and out of the optical path. First, refer to FIG. 29. In this embodiment, a prism surface of a minute prism plate formed of glass having a refractive index? 1 is covered with a resin material having a refractive index? 2. When the light incident perpendicularly to the non-smooth surface (smooth surface) of the tiny prism plate is changed by the angle Θ !, only the image of the one-pixel portion of the projected surface moves. Furthermore, it is assumed that the distance between the image areas on the image display panel 8 is p, and the distance between the pixel area surface of the image display panel $ and the prism surface (refractive surface) is Z. In this embodiment, the structure of the micro cymbal plate is designed. In this embodiment, FK5 glass is used as the material of the micro prism plate, and the surface of the prism surface is LOCKTIGHT 363 manufactured by LOCKTIGHT Company as a UV hardening resin for leveling the concrete surface. Assume that the pixel area's pitch P is 26 A m, the distance Z is 5 mm, the tilt angle of the micro prism is P 2 (= the angle of incidence of the light into the tilted surface of the micro prism), and the light is refracted by the micro chirp. When the angle is Θ 3, θ 1 is 0.3 ° according to the above formula. At this time, since the refractive index of the glass is nl and the refractive index of the resin is ", the relationship between Θ 2 and Θ 3 is based on the Schrödinger d · 3 = η 2 · si ^ and has a relationship. Therefore, if 1;] ^ 5 The refractive index of glass is 1.487, the refractive index of LOCKTIGHT 363 is 152.0, and the inclination angle Θ 2 of the minute 稜鏡 is 13.7. In this case, the amount of movement equivalent to the pitch p can be obtained. When various parameters satisfy the above formula, they are not limited to the material and number of this embodiment. In addition, it is not necessary to level the resin.

1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（50 ) 棱鏡面，亦可予以省略。 將圖29所示之棱鏡板及繞射光栅用作圖像移動元件時， 圖像顯示面板8與圖像移動元件之間的距離被限定在一定 的距離Z，於上述光學設計完成後，該距離不可改變成任 意的大小。 爲求不受上述限制，而獲得可以***光程上任意位置的 圖像移動元件，則如圖30所示，使上述微小稜鏡板或繞射 光柵彼此相對即可。一對微小棱鏡板之間，或一對繞射光 柵之間填入具有與這些材料不同折射率n2的樹脂材料等即 可。2個微小棱鏡板可以SF2玻璃形成，這2個微小稜鏡可 使用LOCKTIGHT公司之UV硬4匕樹月旨的LOCKTIGHT 363黏 合。微小棱鏡板間的距離Z可以爲1 mm。此時，由於SF2 玻璃的折射率爲1.64，LOCKTIGHT 363的折射率爲1.52， 因此’微小棱鏡的傾斜角Θ爲19.6。時，光程的移動量△ D 約爲2 6 a m。 爲在被投影面上之不同的3點間顯示子幀圖像，製作如 圖3 1所示之組合之圖29及圖30所示之元件的元件27即可。 該元件27設計成區域A及區域B分別具有不同的移動量AD。 若使此種元件27週期性操作，在某個子幀期間不***光程 中，而在其他子幀期間***光程中，即可達到適切的圖像 移動。 上述圖29及圖30的範例中，雖在圖式的紙面内方向產生 光束的移動，不過由於可單獨考慮移動區域之邊界線的移 動方向及光束的移動方向’因此，光束的移動方向並不=1227338 A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (50) The prism surface can also be omitted. When the prism plate and the diffraction grating shown in FIG. 29 are used as the image moving element, the distance between the image display panel 8 and the image moving element is limited to a certain distance Z. After the above optical design is completed, the The distance cannot be changed to any size. In order to obtain an image moving element that can be inserted at any position on the optical path without being restricted by the above, as shown in FIG. 30, the above-mentioned micro diaphragm or diffraction grating may be opposed to each other. A resin material having a refractive index n2 different from these materials may be filled between a pair of minute prism plates or a pair of diffraction gratings. Two tiny prism plates can be formed from SF2 glass. These two tiny prisms can be glued using LOCKTIGHT's UV hard 4 dagger tree locker LOCKTIGHT 363. The distance Z between the tiny prism plates can be 1 mm. At this time, since the refractive index of SF2 glass is 1.64 and the refractive index of LOCKTIGHT 363 is 1.52, the inclination angle Θ of the 'micro prism' is 19.6. At this time, the movement amount ΔD of the optical path is about 2 6 a m. In order to display the sub-frame image between three different points on the projected surface, it is sufficient to make the element 27 of the element shown in Fig. 29 and Fig. 30 in the combination shown in Fig. 31. The element 27 is designed so that the areas A and B have different amounts of movement AD, respectively. If such an element 27 is operated periodically, it is not inserted into the optical path during a certain sub-frame, and is inserted into the optical path during other sub-frames, so that a proper image movement can be achieved. In the examples of FIGS. 29 and 30 described above, although the beam movement occurs in the direction of the drawing on the paper surface, the movement direction of the boundary line of the movement area and the movement direction of the beam can be considered separately. Therefore, the movement direction of the beam is not =

裝Hold

-53--53-

1227338 A7 _____ B7 五、發明説明（54 ) 端表面形成有微小稜鏡陣列。更詳細而言，本實施形態的 圖像移動元件係以表面覆蓋有透明電極丨丨及定向膜丨2之微 小棱鏡陣列i3所形成之透明基板，與表面覆蓋有透明電極 11及定向膜i2之透明基板夾住絲狀液晶層i5的液晶元件。 液晶層i5被均勻定向，在兩個透明電極丨丨之間施加有電壓 時’係如圖34所示的，定向在與基板垂直的方向，沒有施 加電壓的狀態下，則如圖3 5所示的，形成均勻定向狀態。 /又有施加電壓時之液晶層i5的折射率爲ne2，施加電壓時的 液晶層i5的折射率爲n。2。本實施形態以折射率接近ne2的 材料形成微小稜鏡陣列i3。 沒有施加電壓時，因液晶層與微小棱鏡陣列i3之間產生 折射率差，所以射入微小棱鏡陣列i3的光束係依據斯涅耳 走律折射。此外，施加電壓時，因應施加電壓的大小，液 晶層與微小棱鏡陣列i3間的折射率差減少。隨折射率差的 減少，射入微小棱鏡陣列i3之光束的折射角度也減少。 若微小棱鏡的頂角爲Θ 4，微小棱鏡陣列i3的折射率爲n2 時，於液晶層i5上沒有施加電壓時的光束折射角J，尤以 下公式表示： ά = (ne2-n2) X θ 4 另外’增加折射角時，宜使用折射率之各向異性大的液 晶層。 組合兩個上述元件，配置成圖3ί所示的狀態時，即形成 本貫施形態的圖像移動元件。若兩個微小棱鏡陣列間的距 離爲L時’該圖像移動元件之圖像移動量△ 〇由以下公式表 ____ -57- &amp;張尺度適财@ s家標準(CNS) M_21G χ 297公6 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（551227338 A7 _____ B7 V. Description of the invention (54) A micro ridge array is formed on the end surface. In more detail, the image moving element of this embodiment is a transparent substrate formed by a micro prism array i3 whose surface is covered with a transparent electrode and an orientation film, and the surface is covered with a transparent electrode 11 and an orientation film i2. The transparent substrate sandwiches the liquid crystal element of the filamentous liquid crystal layer i5. The liquid crystal layer i5 is uniformly aligned, and when a voltage is applied between the two transparent electrodes, as shown in FIG. 34, the orientation is perpendicular to the substrate without voltage, as shown in FIG. As shown, a uniform orientation state is formed. / The refractive index of the liquid crystal layer i5 when a voltage is applied is ne2, and the refractive index of the liquid crystal layer i5 when a voltage is applied is n. 2. In this embodiment, a micro chirped array i3 is formed of a material having a refractive index close to ne2. When no voltage is applied, a refractive index difference occurs between the liquid crystal layer and the micro prism array i3, so the light beam entering the micro prism array i3 is refracted according to Snell's law. In addition, when a voltage is applied, the refractive index difference between the liquid crystal layer and the micro prism array i3 decreases according to the magnitude of the applied voltage. As the refractive index difference decreases, the refraction angle of the light beam entering the micro prism array i3 also decreases. If the apex angle of the micro prism is Θ 4 and the refractive index of the micro prism array i3 is n2, the beam refraction angle J when no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal layer i5 is expressed by the following formula: ά = (ne2-n2) X θ 4 In addition, when increasing the refraction angle, a liquid crystal layer having a large refractive index anisotropy should be used. When two of the above-mentioned elements are combined and arranged in the state shown in Fig. 3, an image moving element in a conventional form is formed. If the distance between the two micro prism arrays is L, the image movement amount of the image moving element △ 〇 is represented by the following formula ____ -57- &amp; Zhang Jiu Shi Shi Cai (CNS) M_21G χ 297 Public 6 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (55

示： Δ D = L · tan ά 本實施形態於玻璃板厚度爲0.5 mm，微小棱鏡陣列間隔 爲1.0 mm，微小棱鏡的頂角Θ 4爲1〇。時，使用M 製之料件號碼BL-009的液晶材料。此時，折射率 1.82’折射率n。2爲1.53，移動量的範爲爲〇〜5〇心m。 亦即，採用本實施形態的圖像移動元件時，可移動約2個 像素部分。 亦可在透明基板上設置具有指定光柵間隔的繞射光柵， 來取代上述的微小棱鏡陣列i3。因應射入光的波長，選擇 適切光柵間隔時，可使光線以所需的繞射角繞射。 另外，縱使採用畫面統一寫入方式時，也會因圖像顯示 面板的應答緩慢而發生上述摻色及重像的問題。因此，宜 在光程上配置液晶光閘及機械光閘等遮光裝置，於圖像顯 示面板發生應答緩慢時，遮蔽圖像顯示面板射出的光線。 另外，本實施形態之圖像移動元件若也設置將其電極分 割成數個部分，依序驅動被分割之數個部分的電路時，可 將子幀圖像的切換與畫面上依序執行形式的圖像顯示面板 組合。此時，圖像的切換不僅藉由線掃瞄來進行，同時亦 可適用於以數個或數行像素構成的區塊單位來進行圖像的 切換。 (第1 1種實施形態） _ 其次’參照圖3 7來說明本發明之投影型圖像顯示裝置的 系統構造範例。 ___ -58- 本紙蘇尺度適用中國國豕標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公袭) 1227338 A7 ___ B7 五、發明説明（56 ) 如圖37所示，本系統主要包含··影像信號處理電路 1〇〇、照明光學系統（光源等）1〇2、圖像顯示面板（液晶顯示 元件）104、圖像移動元件1〇6、圖像移動元件控制電路 108、及投影透鏡11〇。 有關照明光學系統102、圖像顯示面板1 〇4、圖像移動元 件106、及投影透鏡110已經說明過，以下主要針對影像信 號處理電路100及圖像移動元件控制電路1 來説明各構成 元件的關係。 本實施形態之影像信號處理電路1 〇〇包含：輸入信號選 擇電路120、影像解調電路122、γ/C分離電路124、掃瞒電 路126、幀速轉換電路128、幀記憶體電路13〇、系統控制 電路132、及色彩信號選擇電路134。 輸入信號選擇電路120接收數種影像信號時，執行因應 其影像信號種類的處理。影像信號包含··分離成R，G，B 的信號（RGB信號）、亮度信號Y與分離成色差信號 Y的信號（Y/ C信號）、將以色差信號調變彩色載波的色彩作 號C與亮度信號Y頻率多重化的複合影像信號（複合信號） 等。 ； Y/C信號經由輸入信號選擇電路120，被影像解調電路 122解調。此外，複合信號經由輸入信號選擇電路12〇，被 Y/C分離電路124分離成亮度信號γ與色彩信號後，傳送至 影像解調電路122解調。自影像解肩電路122輸出有被影像 信號解調的RGB信號。 輸入至輸入信號選擇電路120上之rgb信號，及自影像解 -59-Note: Δ D = L · tan. In this embodiment, the thickness of the glass plate is 0.5 mm, the interval of the micro prism array is 1.0 mm, and the vertex angle Θ 4 of the micro prism is 10. In this case, a liquid crystal material of BL-009 is used. At this time, the refractive index was 1.82 'and the refractive index was n. 2 is 1.53, and the range of the movement amount is 0 to 50 center m. That is, when the image moving element of this embodiment is used, it can move about 2 pixels. Instead of the above-mentioned micro prism array i3, a diffraction grating having a predetermined grating interval may be provided on a transparent substrate. Depending on the wavelength of the incident light, when a proper grating interval is selected, the light can be diffracted at the required diffraction angle. In addition, even when the unified screen writing method is adopted, the aforementioned problems of color mixing and ghosting occur due to the slow response of the image display panel. Therefore, light-shielding devices such as liquid crystal shutters and mechanical shutters should be arranged on the optical path. When the image display panel responds slowly, the light emitted from the image display panel is blocked. In addition, if the image moving element of this embodiment is also provided with a circuit that divides its electrodes into several parts and sequentially drives the divided parts, the switching of the sub-frame image and the sequential execution of the form on the screen can be performed. Image display panel combination. At this time, the switching of the image is not only performed by line scanning, but also applicable to the switching of the image in a block unit composed of pixels or lines of pixels. (Eleventh Embodiment) _ Next, an example of a system configuration of a projection type image display device of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. ___ -58- This paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public attack) 1227338 A7 ___ B7 V. Description of the invention (56) As shown in Figure 37, this system mainly includes the image signal processing circuit 1 〇〇, illumination optical system (light source, etc.) 102, an image display panel (liquid crystal display element) 104, an image moving element 106, an image moving element control circuit 108, and a projection lens 110. The illumination optical system 102, the image display panel 104, the image moving element 106, and the projection lens 110 have been described. The following mainly describes the components of the image signal processing circuit 100 and the image moving element control circuit 1. relationship. The image signal processing circuit 100 in this embodiment includes: an input signal selection circuit 120, an image demodulation circuit 122, a γ / C separation circuit 124, a concealment circuit 126, a frame rate conversion circuit 128, a frame memory circuit 13, The system control circuit 132 and the color signal selection circuit 134. When the input signal selection circuit 120 receives several types of video signals, it executes processing corresponding to the types of video signals. The video signals include: · signals separated into R, G, and B (RGB signals), luminance signals Y and signals separated into color difference signals Y (Y / C signals), and the color of the color carrier modulated by the color difference signals is number C A composite video signal (composite signal) that is multiplexed with the luminance signal Y frequency. The Y / C signal is demodulated by the video demodulation circuit 122 via the input signal selection circuit 120. In addition, the composite signal is separated into a luminance signal γ and a color signal by the Y / C separation circuit 124 via the input signal selection circuit 120, and then transmitted to the image demodulation circuit 122 for demodulation. An RGB signal demodulated by the video signal is output from the video de-scaping circuit 122. The rgb signal input to the input signal selection circuit 120 and the self-image solution -59-

1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（57 ) 调電路122輸出之RGB信號傳送至掃瞄電路126。掃瞄電路 126將各種輸入信號的像素數量轉換成圖像顯示面板i〇4的 像素數量。幀速轉換電路128將輸入之影像信號的幀速轉 換成適於本系統操作的幀速。 中貞έ己憶體電路13 0由分別儲存R信號、g信號及b信號的三 個幀記憶體所構成。自各幀記憶體依序讀出的資料，被色 彩“號選擇電路13 4以適切的順序選擇，並傳送至圖像顯 示面板104的驅動電路部。圖像顯示面板！ 〇4依據色彩信號 選擇電路134所輸出的資料，顯示子幀圖像。 系統控制電路132控制輸入信號選擇電路12〇、巾貞記憶體 1 30、色彩信號選擇電路134、及圖像移動元件控制電路 108的操作。 圖像移動元件控制電路10 8依據系統控制電路13 2所輸出 的信號，與子幀圖像的顯示同步，控制圖像移動元件1 〇6 的操作。 其次，參照圖38及圖39説明RGB信號自幀記憶體讀出資 料的程序。 對賴記憶體的寫入信號率（頻率fin)雖與輸入信號有關， 不過自幀記憶體的讀出信號率（頻率f〇ut)則受本系統之時鐘 頻率所定義。如頻率fin爲60赫茲（Hz)，如頻率匕以爲180 Hz 〇 因應自系統控制電路132所輸出之控制信號，自r用幀記 憶體130a讀出有R信號，自G用幀記憶體130b讀出有G信 號，自B用幀記憶體130c讀出有B信號。這些信號讀出率爲 -60- 適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)— 1227338 A7 B71227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (57) The RGB signal output from the tuning circuit 122 is transmitted to the scanning circuit 126. The scanning circuit 126 converts the number of pixels of various input signals into the number of pixels of the image display panel i04. The frame rate conversion circuit 128 converts the frame rate of the input video signal into a frame rate suitable for the operation of the system. Zhongzhengji memory circuit 130 is composed of three frame memories storing R signal, g signal and b signal, respectively. The data sequentially read from each frame of memory are selected by the color number selection circuit 13 4 in a proper order and transmitted to the drive circuit section of the image display panel 104. The image display panel! 〇4 selects the circuit based on the color signal The data output by 134 displays the sub-frame image. The system control circuit 132 controls the operation of the input signal selection circuit 12o, the memory 1130, the color signal selection circuit 134, and the image moving element control circuit 108. Image The moving element control circuit 108 controls the operation of the image moving element 1 06 in synchronization with the display of the sub-frame image based on the signal output by the system control circuit 132. Next, the self-frame of the RGB signal will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. The procedure for reading data from memory. Although the write signal rate (frequency fin) to the memory depends on the input signal, the read signal rate (frequency f〇ut) from the frame memory is affected by the clock frequency of the system. Definition: If the frequency fin is 60 Hertz (Hz), and if the frequency is 180 Hz, the R signal is read from the frame memory 130a for r in response to the control signal output from the system control circuit 132. The G signal is read by the frame memory 130b for G, and the B signal is read from the frame memory 130c for B. The readout rate of these signals is -60- Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) — 1227338 A7 B7

五、發明説明（58 操作反覆執行三次。 上述的fcna，在各幀期間，自各幀記憶體13〇a〜13〇c的讀出 。圖式I計時圖係對應於形成圖6所示 記載於圖39最上端的數字爲原圖幀的掃 其次，參照圖39。 之三種子幀圖像。許 瞄線編號。 在圖像顯示面板上顯示第一子幀圖像時，儲存在對應於 各幀记fe體130a〜130c之1號掃瞄線之位址内的資料同時被 讀出。此時，因輸出有啓動信號，所以開始圖像顯示面板 104的線掃瞄。自各幀記憶體130a〜n〇c所讀出之資料（r， G及B信號）雖傳送至圖38所示的色彩信號選擇電路134上， 不過，僅R信號被色彩信號選擇，；路134選擇，並傳送至圖 像顯示面板104上。色彩信號選擇電路134具有因應R，G及 B選擇信號來操作的r，〇及B轉換元件，僅接收邏輯 之選擇仏號的轉換元件將輸入信號傳送至輸出埠。圖3 9的 範例中’僅R信號被選擇，並提供至圖像顯示面板丨〇4的第 一列像素區域（R用像素區域）。 經過一個水平掃瞄期間（1H期間）後，R選擇信號轉變成 邏輯Low，同時，僅G選擇信號轉變成邏輯High。因而， 各幀記憶體130a〜130c中，被儲存在對應於原圖幀之2號掃 瞒線之位址内的資料中，僅自G用幀記憶體讀出的G信號 係經由色彩信號選擇電路134傳送至圖像顯示面板1〇4。依 據該G信號，執行圖像顯示面板1 〇l4之第二列像素區域（G用 像素區域）的顯示。 以下藉由同樣的程序，第一子t貞圖像用的資料依序被生 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1227338 A7 __ B7 一 1 ----------- ------ 五、發明説明（59 ) 成，圖6右上方記載之子幀圖像顯示在圖像顯示面板上。 顯示第二子幀圖像時，如圖3 9所示，僅使啓動脈衝信號 及選擇信號的施加時間延遲1Η期間。亦即，首先在對應於 原圖幀之2號掃瞄線的資料中，儲存於R用幀記憶體内之R 信號被色彩信號選擇電路13 4選擇。繼續，依據該R信號， 進行圖像顯示面板104之第一列圖像區域（R用像素區域）的 顯示。之後，反覆同樣的操作，圖6中之第二子幀圖像顯 示在圖像顯示面板104上。 顯示第三子幀圖像時，使啓動脈衝信號及選擇信號的施 加時間再延遲僅1Η期間。因而可以顯示圖6所示之第三子 巾貞圖像。 - 亦可使幀記憶體開始讀出位址在對應於1〜3號掃瞄線的 數個位址間巡迴，來取代每子幀錯開上述之啓動信號的施 加時間。 此外，本例中係説明將R，G及Β用像素區域分別排列成 與掃猫線平行，不過本發明並不限定於此種系統。將上述 1Η期間替換成點時鐘週期時，對應於使用分別將r，〇及Β 用像素區域排列成與掃瞄線垂直之RGB直線條型圖像顯示 面板的系統操作。 圖38的電路雖未具備專門用於儲存子幀圖像資料的幀記 憶體，不過亦可設置此種幀記憶體，暫時性記憶子幀圖 像。 _ (第1 2種實施形態） 以下，説明具備兩塊圖像顯示面板之投影型圖像顯示装 ___ _ -62- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（61V. Description of the invention (58 operations are executed repeatedly three times. The fcna mentioned above is read from the memory of each frame 13a ~ 13c during each frame. The timing diagram of Figure I corresponds to the formation shown in Figure 6. The uppermost figure in Figure 39 is the scan of the original frame. Refer to Figure 39. Three types of sub-frame images. Number of line of sight. When the first sub-frame image is displayed on the image display panel, it is stored in the corresponding frame. The data in the address of the scanning line No. 1 of the body 130a to 130c is read at the same time. At this time, the line scan of the image display panel 104 is started because the start signal is output. From each frame memory 130a to Although the data (r, G, and B signals) read by noc is transmitted to the color signal selection circuit 134 shown in FIG. 38, only the R signal is selected by the color signal; the path 134 is selected and transmitted to the image. Like the display panel 104. The color signal selection circuit 134 has r, 0, and B conversion elements that operate in response to the R, G, and B selection signals, and only the conversion element receiving the logical selection number sends the input signal to the output port. In the example of 3 'only R signal is selected and provided To the pixel area of the first column of the image display panel (the pixel area for R). After a horizontal scanning period (1H period), the R selection signal changes to logic Low, and only the G selection signal changes to logic. High. Therefore, each frame memory 130a ~ 130c is stored in the data corresponding to the address of the second hidden line of the original frame, and only the G signal read from the G frame memory is passed through the color The signal selection circuit 134 is transmitted to the image display panel 104. Based on the G signal, the display of the second column of pixel regions (pixel regions for G) of the image display panel 104 is performed. Following the same procedure, the first The material for the image of Yizhenzhen is sequentially produced. The paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1227338 A7 __ B7 1 1 ------------ ----- 5. Description of the invention (59), the sub-frame image described in the upper right of Fig. 6 is displayed on the image display panel. When the second sub-frame image is displayed, as shown in FIG. The application time of the pulse signal and the selection signal is delayed by a period of 1 。. That is, first, at the number 2 corresponding to the original picture frame Among the data of the scanning line, the R signal stored in the R frame memory is selected by the color signal selection circuit 13 4. Continue, based on the R signal, the first column of image areas (for R Pixel area). After that, the same operation is repeated, and the second sub-frame image in FIG. 6 is displayed on the image display panel 104. When the third sub-frame image is displayed, the start pulse signal and the selection signal are applied. The time delay is only 1 second. Therefore, the third sub-frame image shown in Fig. 6 can be displayed.-The frame memory can also start to read the addresses at the addresses corresponding to the scanning lines 1 to 3. Instead of shifting the application time of the above-mentioned start signal every sub-frame instead. In this example, it is explained that the pixel regions for R, G, and B are respectively arranged in parallel with the cat line, but the present invention is not limited to such a system. When the period of 1Η is replaced with a dot clock cycle, it corresponds to a system operation using an RGB linear bar type image display panel in which the pixel regions of r, 0, and B are arranged perpendicular to the scanning line. Although the circuit of Fig. 38 is not provided with a frame memory specifically for storing sub-frame image data, such a frame memory may be provided to temporarily store the sub-frame images. _ (12th embodiment) The following is a description of a projection type image display device having two image display panels. _ -62- This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ) 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (61

4(b)及（d)所示之R圖像幀及b圖像幀的資料（R及B信號）來制 作。 另外，第二圖像顯示面板2 8則顯示如僅由G色所構成的 圖像。該圖像具有圖4(c)所示的圖案，反應f貞圖像全部像 素相關之G色的資料。 第二圖像顯示面板28，因不需要分割成子幀來顯示圖 像’所以爲求知、射被投影面之r，G及B色光的平衡適切， 需要在如第一圖像顯示面板18與第二圖像顯示面板28之間 補償焭度’或是補償顯示期間。例如，自第二圖像顯示面 板28射出，而投影在螢幕上之圖像顯示期間可以限定在： 幀期間的約2分之1，或以減低亮度來取代。 本實施形態於第一圖像顯示面板18中僅顯示r，G及b色 中的兩色。另外一色則以第二圖像顯示面板28顯示。第一 圖像顯示面板18上的各微型透鏡將射入光分離成兩色，並 在對應之像素區域聚光。因此，微型透鏡丨7的間距及焦點 距離可以爲單板式微型透鏡7之間距及焦點距離的3分之 2 〇 如以上之説明，本發明藉由移動子幀圖像，將數個子幀 圖像在時間上重疊，以構成幀圖像。觀察者的視線實質上 被？定時，如圖41⑷所示，RGB的像素重疊被適切達成。 仁疋，如圖41(b)所示，觀察者的視線因應子幀圖像的移動 而和動時，纟觀祭者的視網膜± I有如子賴圖像移動不足 的時間上重登。當視線移動速度接近子幀圖像的移動速度 時’如圖41(c)所示，觀察者看到的是子㈣像的移動速度The data (R and B signals) of the R image frame and the b image frame shown in 4 (b) and (d) are prepared. In addition, the second image display panel 28 displays an image composed of only G colors. This image has the pattern shown in Fig. 4 (c), and reflects the G-color data related to all pixels of the f image. The second image display panel 28 does not need to be divided into sub-frames to display the image. Therefore, in order to find out, the balance of r, G, and B color light projected on the projected surface is appropriate. The compensation degree between the two image display panels 28 or the compensation display period. For example, the image display period projected from the second image display panel 28 and projected on the screen may be limited to: approximately one-half of the frame period, or replaced with a reduced brightness. In this embodiment, only two colors of r, G, and b colors are displayed on the first image display panel 18. The other color is displayed on the second image display panel 28. Each microlens on the first image display panel 18 separates the incident light into two colors and focuses the light in the corresponding pixel area. Therefore, the pitch and focal distance of the microlens 7 can be 2/3 of the distance and focal distance between the single-plate microlenses 7 As described above, the present invention moves several sub-frame images by moving the sub-frame images. Overlaid in time to form a frame image. What is the observer's line of sight? At timing, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the pixel overlap of RGB is appropriately achieved. Ren Zheng, as shown in Figure 41 (b), when the observer's line of sight is in harmony with the movement of the sub-frame image, the retina ± I of the observing sacrifice reappears at a time when Zi Lai's image has not moved enough. When the moving speed of the line of sight is close to the moving speed of the sub-frame image ', as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the observer sees the moving speed of the sub-image.

裝 η•i 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（62 ) '~ - 減低。視線移動速度與子幀圖像的移動速度概略相等時， 則看不出子帽圖像的移動。以致，圖像顯示面板上的像素 排列被觀察出，解像度降低至構成圖像顯示面板的像素排 列程度。 μ 此種現象係因視線移動方向及速度與子幀圖像的移動方 向及移動速度概略-致所引起。因而，藉由特別設計子帕 圖像㈣動圖案，可以減低此種現象的影響。其減低的效 果可精由對沿著子幀圖像移動方向（如y方向）之丨行像素調 查沿著時間軸（t軸）並列之平面像素㈣之圖案的空間頻率 ㈣（頻譜）來評冑。該平面性的像素排列係在縱轴爲y轴， 橫軸爲時間軸（t軸）的空間（厂t空_間）中表現出於y轴方向上 下之子幅的移動圖案者。被投影面上，爲分析向y軸方向 移動之子幅圖像的移動圖案，可對Η空間的像素排列進 平面傅里葉轉換，有效評價y軸方向之空間頻率及t軸方向 〈更間頻率的相關頻譜。y_t空間的像素㈣，因像素具 在光柵點上規則排列的圖案，因此其頻譜在傅里葉命 (fy-ft空間）表現出實質上的局部點。 二β 傅里葉轉換圖15所示之3Μ空間之像素排列所獲得之頻级 的-種範例如圖42⑷所#。圖42⑷中，以符號〇所表^ 的各局邵點對應於y_t空間之像素排列的空間頻率。 =圖15所示之比較單調的圖案移動子_像時，視線朝 疋万向’以特定速度移動時，會突然發生前述的現象。 馬求加以避免，需要將子頓圖像的移動圖案複雜化… 間頻率分散成許多成分。具體而言，係在y-t空間内，如2Equipment η • i 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (62) '~-Reduced. When the line-of-sight moving speed is roughly equal to the moving speed of the sub-frame image, the movement of the sub-cap image cannot be seen. As a result, the pixel arrangement on the image display panel is observed, and the resolution is reduced to the degree of the pixel arrangement constituting the image display panel. μ This phenomenon is caused by the moving direction and speed of the line of sight and the moving direction and moving speed of the sub-frame image. Therefore, the effect of this phenomenon can be reduced by specially designing the zipper image motion pattern. The reduction effect can be precisely evaluated by investigating the rows of pixels along the sub-frame image moving direction (such as the y direction), and examining the spatial frequency ㈣ (spectrum) of the pattern of plane pixels 并 juxtaposed along the time axis (t axis). helmet. This planar pixel arrangement is a pattern in which the vertical axis is the y axis and the horizontal axis is the time axis (t axis). In order to analyze the moving pattern of the sub-images moving in the y-axis direction on the projected surface, the pixels in the unitary space can be arranged in a plane Fourier transform to effectively evaluate the spatial frequency in the y-axis direction and the t-axis direction Related spectrum. The pixels ㈣ in y_t space, because the pixels have a pattern arranged regularly on the raster points, their spectrum shows a substantial local point in Fourier life (fy-ft space). An example of the frequency levels obtained by the two β Fourier transform of the pixel arrangement in the 3M space shown in Figure 15 is shown in Figure 42. In FIG. 42 (a), each station point indicated by the symbol 0 corresponds to the spatial frequency of the pixel arrangement in the y_t space. When the sub-image is moved in a relatively monotonous pattern as shown in FIG. 15, when the line of sight is moved toward the gimbal ’at a specific speed, the aforementioned phenomenon suddenly occurs. To avoid it, Ma needs to complicate the moving pattern of the sub-ton image ... The frequency is dispersed into many components. Specifically, it is tied in y-t space, such as 2

本紙張尺㈣騎關家標準(CNS) A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐） 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（63 色（R)像素，由於彼此包含向六卜士七t 、 ^句右上万排列邵分與向右下方 排列部分的排列方式，比斜向右 古# &lt; i 町Π石上万一直線延伸的排列方 式，其像素排列的空間頻率較爲分磚 、个平又馬刀散，因此較爲適宜。y-t 芝間之像素排列的空間頻率公矣咕 你 』叉、手刀政時，傳里葉空間内之頻譜 的局部點也分散。 因此，決定y-t空間之像辛拙别同安 化你 私i辨列圖案，使傳里葉空間（fy-ft 空間）的局部點更分散時，容易抽制卜，+以 今勿仰制上述現象在特定視線 移動速度發生的弊端。 此外，決定y-t空間之像素排列圖案，使傅里葉空間的局 部點對fy軸保持對稱性時，容易抑制上述現象在特定視線 移動方向發生的弊端。 _ 再者，決定y-t空間之像素排列圖案，使傅里葉空間之局 部點儘量位於fy&lt;ft的區域内時，以比較慢的視線移動速度 不容易發生上述現象。 本發明藉由RGB的三個像素在時間上重疊來形成所需顏 色的像素，户斤以，係以相互移動之三個子幀圖像的組合爲' 單位構成圖像。圖43顯示分別由三個子幀構成之六種子集 合1A〜3A及1B〜3B。本發明可採用的移動圖案，全部可= 由組合圖43之六種子集合獲得。六種子集合分類成包含^ 集合1A〜3A的A群，及包含子集合1β〜3^々β群。a群與b 群彼此爲移動方向相反（對稱）的關係。例如，子集合丨八'的 子幀圖像逐一像素的向+y方向移動，子集合⑶的子幀圖 像，則逐一像素的向-y方向移動。同樣的，子集合2八與子 集合2B對稱，子集合3A與子集合3B對稱。 -66-The paper size of the paper ruler (CNS) A4 specification (21〇X 297 mm) 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (63 color (R) pixels, because each contains six t, t The arrangement of the shaofen and the lower-right arrangement is more straightforward than the oblique to the ancient ## i-machi ii Ishikamiman, whose spatial frequency of pixel arrangement is more brick, flat, and saber, so It ’s more suitable. The space frequency of the pixel arrangement of yt Shima whispers you. When you use a fork and a hand knife, the local points of the spectrum in Chuanye space are also scattered. Therefore, the image that determines the yt space is awkward. Do n’t disturb you. The private i distinguishing pattern makes the local points in the Fourier space (fy-ft space) more scattered, and it is easy to make a fuss. + Do not suppress the disadvantages of the above phenomenon at a specific line of sight movement speed. In addition, determine yt When the pixel arrangement pattern in space keeps the symmetry of the local points in Fourier space to the fy axis, it is easy to suppress the disadvantages of the above phenomenon in a specific direction of sight movement. _ Furthermore, the pixel arrangement pattern in yt space is determined to make Fourier Leaf space When the local point is located as far as possible within the area of fy &lt; ft, the above phenomenon is not easy to occur at a relatively slow moving speed of the line of sight. The present invention forms pixels of a desired color by overlapping three pixels of RGB in time, The image is composed of a combination of three sub-frame images that move with each other as a unit. FIG. 43 shows six seed sets 1A to 3A and 1B to 3B that are respectively composed of three sub-frames. = Obtained by combining the six seed sets of Figure 43. The six seed sets are classified into A groups containing ^ sets 1A ~ 3A, and subgroups 1β ~ 3 ^ 々β groups. Groups a and b are in opposite directions (symmetric) ). For example, the sub-frame images of the subset 丨 'are moved pixel by pixel in the + y direction, and the sub-frame images of the subset CG are pixel-by-pixel in the -y direction. Similarly, the subset 2 Eight is symmetrical with sub-set 2B, and sub-set 3A is symmetric with sub-set 3B. -66-

1227338 A7 ______ B7 I、發明説明（5~'~&quot; 後述的實施形態中，適切組合這些子集合，構成移動圖 案’來抑制因觀察者視線移動造成顯示品質降低。 另外，隨視線移動造成上述現象的影響，亦可藉由精心 設計圖像顯示面板的像素排列而獲得減低。亦即，該現象 的發生在子頓圖像的移動與視線移動完全一致時最爲顯 著，此時，觀祭者觀察出圖像顯示面板上的實際像素排 列。因而，將圖像顯示面板上的像素排列（x_y空間）予以傅 里葉轉換，可以傅里葉空間來評價。具體而言，宜滿足 RGB的二個像素沿著移動方向成直線排列的條件，同時在 像素排列（x-y空間）的傅里葉空間中，儘量選擇在距原點更 遠位置存在局邵點的像素排列（x-y空間）。採用此種像素排 列（x-y空間）時，每種顏色的空間解像度提高。 以下说明，考慮上述事項，將子幀圖像的移動圖案改良 成更佳圖案的實施形態。 第1 3種實施形態 本實施形態之投影型圖像顯示裝置，基本上具有與第i 種貫施形態同樣的構造，主要的差異在於採用可減緩上述 現象之子幀圖像的移動圖案。因此在以下僅説明該差異部 分0 第1種實施形態，如圖12所示的，具有3個構成第n+1(n j正整數）幀圖像的子幀圖像，使其移動的方向與使構成 第η幀圖像之子幀圖像的移動方询相同，但是本實施形 怨，則如圖44所示，子幀圖像的移動圖案係以6個子幀圖 像（子集合1Α與子集合2Β)爲1週期。藉由將子集合丨八與子1227338 A7 ______ B7 I. Description of the invention (5 ~ '~ &quot; In the embodiment described later, these sub-sets are appropriately combined to form a moving pattern to prevent the display quality from being degraded due to the movement of the observer's line of sight. In addition, the above caused by the movement of the line of sight causes the above The effect of the phenomenon can also be reduced by carefully designing the pixel arrangement of the image display panel. That is, this phenomenon occurs most significantly when the movement of the Ziton image is completely consistent with the movement of the line of sight. The person observes the actual pixel arrangement on the image display panel. Therefore, the pixel arrangement (x_y space) on the image display panel is Fourier-transformed and can be evaluated in Fourier space. Specifically, it is desirable to meet the RGB The condition that two pixels are arranged in a straight line along the moving direction. At the same time, in the Fourier space of the pixel arrangement (xy space), try to choose a pixel arrangement that has a local point farther away from the origin (xy space). When such a pixel arrangement (xy space) is used, the spatial resolution of each color is improved. In the following description, the moving pattern of a sub-frame image is considered in consideration of the above matters. An embodiment of a better pattern. 13th Embodiment The projection-type image display device of this embodiment basically has the same structure as the i-th embodiment. The main difference is that it uses a sub-frame that can reduce the above phenomenon. The moving pattern of the image. Therefore, only the first embodiment of the difference part 0 will be described below. As shown in FIG. 12, there are three sub-frame images constituting the n + 1 (nj positive integer) frame image. The moving direction is the same as that of moving the sub-frame image constituting the n-th frame image, but in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the moving pattern of the sub-frame image is 6 sub-frame images. (Subset 1A and Subset 2B) is 1 cycle.

1227338 五、發明説明（65 组合成圖44的形態，移動圖案的i週期包含兩次(+ y =與=向的兩次)兩個像素部分的移動。圖44的移動 二並，傳里茱空間上具有圖42(b)所示的頻譜局部 .占。將”與圖42⑷比較時，儘管是由同數的子悄構成移動 圖案的i週期，但是瞭解圖42⑻所示的局部點較爲分散。 因而’本實施形態在特定的視線移動方向及特定的移動速 度時，第1 #實施形態較不纟易發生上述的現象。此 外，因以6個子幀構成丨週期，所以丨週期比較短，圖像移 動元件的構成也比較單純。 本貫施形態使用之子幅圖像的移動圖案，亦可以2個子 幀構成1幀，亦可以3個子幀構成1幀。 此種用於進行圖像移動之圖像移動元件的一種範例如圖 45所π。該圖像移動元件具備玻璃板22e，其具有透明區 域A〜F。透明區域八及〇由折射率149iFK5玻璃所形成， 透明區域B及F由折射率^之以以玻璃所形成，透明區域 C及E由折射率1.64之SF2玻璃所形成。各透明區域的厚度 均爲2.0 mm。 將此種構造之圓盤狀玻璃板22e的主面對光軸形成65。的 角度。因而’使各透明區域橫切光程的時間與切換成對應 其之子賴的時間同步，旋轉玻璃板22e。藉此，透明區域b 及F對透明區域A及D，光程僅移動34.0〆m，透明區域C及 E對透明區域B及F，光程僅移動26_.6ym。 透明區域A ’例如對應於圖44所示之最初子幀，此時， k明區域B對應於下一個子巾貞，透明區域c以後也依序對 _ -68- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公爱)1227338 V. Description of the Invention (65 forms of the combination of Figure 44. The i-period of the moving pattern contains two (+ y = and = twice) movements of two pixel parts. The movement of Figure 44 is merged, and it is passed on. In the space, there is a local part of the spectrum shown in Fig. 42 (b). Comparing "" with Fig. 42 (a), although the i-period of the moving pattern is composed of the same number of children, it is easy to understand the local points shown in Fig. 42 (b). Therefore, 'this embodiment is less prone to the above-mentioned phenomenon when a specific line of sight movement direction and a specific movement speed are adopted. In addition, since the six sub-frames constitute a cycle, the cycle is relatively short. The structure of the image moving element is relatively simple. The moving pattern of the sub-images used in this embodiment can also be composed of 2 sub-frames or 1 frame. This type of image movement is also used. An example of an image moving element is shown in Figure 45. The image moving element is provided with a glass plate 22e, which has transparent areas A to F. The transparent areas VIII and 〇 are formed of glass with refractive index 149iFK5, and the transparent areas B and F From the refractive index ^ The transparent regions C and E are formed of SF2 glass with a refractive index of 1.64. The thickness of each transparent region is 2.0 mm. The main surface of the disc-shaped glass plate 22e having such a structure is 65. Therefore, 'synchronize the time of the transversal optical path of each transparent region with the time of switching to the corresponding one, and rotate the glass plate 22e. With this, the transparent regions b and F move to the transparent regions A and D, and the optical path moves only 34.0 〆m, transparent areas C and E versus transparent areas B and F, and the optical path moves only 26_.6ym. The transparent area A 'corresponds to, for example, the first sub-frame shown in FIG. 44. At this time, the bright area B corresponds to the next Zizhenzhen, transparent area c will also be ordered in the future_ -68- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 public love)

1227338 A7 ___ ______ B7 五、發明説明（66 ) 應。 本實施形態也會因圖像顯示面板的應答緩慢等因素，在 圖像移動與子幀切換之間發生時間偏差。因而，如圖1 7所 示’宜在玻璃板22的適切部分設置遮光區域2 1。圖1 7中， 只須在應該進行圖像移動的兩個區域的邊界（透明區域A及 D的各兩端）設置遮光區域21即可。 當然，圖像顯示元件亦可使用其他實施形態中記載的圖 像移動元件。 另外，本實施形態係採用圖46的像素排列作爲圖像顯示 面板的像素排列。例如，圖47的像素排列與圖46之像素排 列的傅里葉空間狀態，分別如圖48(a)及（b)所示。圖48(a) 中判定出在距離原點更遠的位置上有局部點。顯示圖46與 圖47之連結相同顏色像素之各直線的間隔，以圖46較爲狹 窄，亦即，各色的空間頻率高。如上可知，藉由採用圖46 所示的像素排列，縱使視線移動與子巾貞圖像移動概略一 致，·能辨識出圖像顯示面板的像素排列，卻對畫質的不良 影響更少。 採用本實施形態之投影型圖像顯示裝置，也因使用無彩 色濾光器之圖像顯示面板，在各幀期間生成3個子幀圖 像，使這些圖像進行光學性移動、合成，所以與使用先前 之彩色濾光器之單板式投影型圖像顯示裝置比較，可大幅 提高光使用率，且可達到3倍的解像度。當然，亦可在各 幀期間生成2個子幀圖像，使這些圖像進行光學性移動、 合成。雖然動畫中有若干移動不順暢，但因這個部分的子 -69- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 1227338 五、發明説明（π ; 幀切換率緩慢，所以液晶充分應答，可獲得更佳穿透率狀 (第1 4種實施形態） 本實施形態之投影型圖像顯示裝置，基本上也具有血第 13種實施㈣㈣的構造，主要的差異在於子㈣像的移 動圖案。因此以下僅説明該差異部分。 訂 第1 3種貫施形態，如圖44所示，子幀圖像之移動圖案的 L週期係由6個子幀圖像（子集合1A&amp;2B)所構成，本實施形 態則如圖49所示，子悄圖像之移動圖案的1週期由18個‘ j圖像(6個子集合)所構成。本實施形態自子集合的A群中 遙擇子集合1A及子集合3A，自子集合的崎中選擇子集合 及子集合2B後，交互配置A群的子集合與B群的 °轉〈子集合與B群之子集合的交互配置，係指僅向 + y方向和動與向_ y方向移動概略相等的次數交互執行。 以致，縱使觀察者使視線向某方向移動，其視線移動方向 與圖像移動方向一致的可能性減半，此外，縱使其方向— 致時，—致的時間不致連續超過3子幀期間。 ® 49之移動圖案的傅里葉空間狀態’如圖42⑷所示。與 二呀)的之部點比較，可知圖42(c)的局部點更加分散。 ^ ’本:r施形態在特定的視線移動速度下 上述現象。 刃贫玍 另外1秒1里間顯示有60幀的圖-像時，若1幀由3子幀構 子鴨期間爲1/180秒。因本實施形態之移動圖案的 月由18個子幅所構成，户斤以移動圖案的丨週期即爲 -70- 297^¾) 紙張尺度相中a g家標準(CNs) ^規格⑽; 1227338五、發明説明（68 ) A7 B7 1/ ISO秒X I8 = 1/10秒。肉眼争法確認移動圖案對以1〇 Hz 反覆顯π的影響。雖然亦可以超過丨8的子幀數構成移動圖 案的1週期’但疋1週期過長時，肉眼即可能確認出移動圖 案的週期性變化，因而導致顯示品質惡化。因此，移動圖 案的1週期宜以18個以下的子幀來構成。 採用本實施形態使用之子幀圖像的移動圖案，可以2個 子幀構成1幀，亦可以3個子帽構成。 適於本貫施形態使用之圖像移動元件的範例如圖5 〇所 示0 該圖像移動元件具備玻璃板22，其具有透明區域a〜R。 透明區域A，D，Η，L，N及P由折射率ι·49之FK5玻璃所形 成’透明區域6，孖，1，〖，0及11由折射率157之6&amp;1^4玻璃 所形成’透明區域C，Ε，G，J，Μ及Q由折射率1.64之SF2 玻璃所形成。各透明區域的厚度均爲2.0 mm。 將此種構造之圓盤狀玻璃板22k的主面對光軸形成65。 的角度。使各透明區域橫切光程的時間與切換成對應其之 子幀的時間同步，來旋轉玻璃板22k。藉此，透明區域b， ?，1，艮，0及11對透明區域人，0，：《，1^，：^及？，光程僅移 動34.0&quot;m，透明區域C，E，G，J，M及Q對透明區域b， F，I，K，0及R，光程僅移動26.6 # m。 透明區域A，如對應於圖49所示之最初子幀。此時，透 明區域B對應於下一個子幀，透明―區域C以後也依序對應。 (圖像移動元件的第一種改良例） 其次説明圖像移動元件的改良例。 -71- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(21〇 x 297公爱）1227338 A7 ___ ______ B7 V. Description of Invention (66) Should. In this embodiment, a time lag between image movement and sub-frame switching also occurs due to factors such as the slow response of the image display panel. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 17 ', it is preferable to provide a light-shielding region 21 at a proper portion of the glass plate 22. In FIG. 17, it is only necessary to set a light-shielding area 21 at the boundary of the two areas (both ends of the transparent areas A and D) where the image should be moved. Of course, the image display device may use the image moving device described in the other embodiments. In this embodiment, the pixel arrangement of FIG. 46 is adopted as the pixel arrangement of the image display panel. For example, the Fourier spatial state of the pixel arrangement of Fig. 47 and the pixel arrangement of Fig. 46 are shown in Figs. 48 (a) and (b), respectively. It is determined in Fig. 48 (a) that there are local points at a position farther from the origin. The intervals between the straight lines connecting the pixels of the same color shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47 are narrower in FIG. 46, that is, the spatial frequency of each color is high. As can be seen from the above, by adopting the pixel arrangement shown in FIG. 46, even though the line of sight movement is roughly the same as that of the sub-picture image, the pixel arrangement of the image display panel can be recognized, but it has less adverse effect on the image quality. The projection type image display device of this embodiment also uses an image display panel without a color filter to generate three sub-frame images during each frame period, and optically moves and synthesizes these images. Compared with the single-plate projection image display device using the previous color filter, the light utilization rate can be greatly improved, and the resolution can be 3 times. Of course, two sub-frame images may be generated during each frame, and these images may be optically moved and combined. Although there are some movements in the animation that are not smooth, but because of the sub-69- size of this paper, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 1227338 V. Description of the invention (π; the frame switching rate is slow, so the LCD Sufficient response for better penetration (14th embodiment) The projection-type image display device of this embodiment also basically has the structure of the 13th embodiment of the blood vessel, and the main difference lies in the child image Therefore, only the difference will be described below. Order the 13th implementation mode, as shown in Fig. 44. The L period of the moving pattern of the sub-frame image consists of 6 sub-frame images (subset 1A &amp; 2B). ), This embodiment is shown in FIG. 49, and one cycle of the moving pattern of the sub-picture is composed of 18 'j images (6 sub-sets). This embodiment is a group A from the sub-set. Selector set 1A and subset 3A. After selecting the subset and subset 2B from the subset's Saki, the ° turn of the subset of the A group and the B group is interactively configured. Refers to moving only in the + y direction and moving and _ y direction. The execution is performed a slightly equal number of times, so that even if the observer moves the line of sight in a certain direction, the possibility of the line of sight moving in line with the direction of the image is halved, and in addition, even if the direction is not consistent, the time is not continuous. More than 3 sub-frame periods. The Fourier space state of the moving pattern of ® 49 is shown in Fig. 42 (a). Compared with the two points of (2)), it can be seen that the local points in Fig. 42 (c) are more scattered. ^ ‘This: the above phenomenon at a specific line of sight speed. In addition, when 60 frames of image-image are displayed in 1 second and 1 mile, if 1 frame consists of 3 sub frames, the sub-duck period is 1/180 second. Because the month of the moving pattern of this embodiment is composed of 18 sub-frames, the household period of the moving pattern is -70- 297 ^ ¾) In the paper standard phase, the ag home standards (CNs) ^ specifications ⑽; 1227338 Description of the invention (68) A7 B7 1 / ISO second X I8 = 1/10 second. The naked eye method confirmed the effect of the moving pattern on π repeatedly at 10 Hz. Although the number of sub-frames exceeding 8 may constitute one cycle of the moving pattern ', if the first cycle is too long, the naked eye may recognize the periodic change of the moving pattern, which may cause the display quality to deteriorate. Therefore, one cycle of the moving pattern should preferably be composed of 18 or fewer subframes. According to the moving pattern of the sub-frame image used in this embodiment, two sub-frames can be used to form a frame, or three sub-caps can be used. An example of an image moving element suitable for use in this embodiment is shown in FIG. 5. The image moving element includes a glass plate 22 having transparent areas a to R. The transparent areas A, D, Η, L, N and P are formed by FK5 glass with a refractive index ι · 49. The transparent areas 6, 孖, 1, 0, 11 and 0 are made of 6 with a refractive index 157 &amp; 1 ^ 4 glass. The 'transparent regions C, E, G, J, M and Q are formed of SF2 glass having a refractive index of 1.64. The thickness of each transparent area is 2.0 mm. The optical axis of the main surface of the disc-shaped glass plate 22k having such a structure is 65. Angle. The glass plate 22k is rotated by synchronizing the time at which each transparent region crosses the optical path with the time at which it is switched to the corresponding sub-frame. With this, the transparent areas b, ，, 1, gen, 0, and 11 are paired with the transparent area, 0,: ", 1 ^ ,: ^, and? The optical path moves only 34.0 &quot; m, the transparent areas C, E, G, J, M, and Q versus the transparent areas b, F, I, K, 0, and R, and the optical path moves only 26.6 # m. The transparent area A corresponds to the first subframe shown in FIG. 49. At this time, the transparent area B corresponds to the next sub-frame, and the transparent-area C will also correspond sequentially. (First Modified Example of Image Moving Element) Next, a modified example of the image moving element will be described. -71- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇 x 297 public love)

裝 訂 •k 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（70 ) 有雙重或三重像，可能造成畫質顯著惡化。 因此，使用兩個以上的液晶層，在分別對液晶層施加電 壓的狀態下，選擇三個不同位置時，縱使過渡性的產生自 開啓至關閉（ON— OFF)的轉變遲緩，仍需要驅動畫質不致 惡化的移動元件。 以下説明經過改善不致發生上述問題之圖像移動元件的 驅動方法。 (第1 5種實施形態） 本實施形態的圖像移動元件具有兩個如圖32(或圖33)所 示的元件，這兩個元件如圖53所示的串聯配置在光程上。 本實施形態使用具有雙折射性的結晶板g3及結晶板g4構成 圖像移動元件。採用該圖像移動元件，藉由對位於光程上 之光射入端及光射出端的兩個液晶層施加電壓的狀態，可 選擇被投影面上的三個不同位置。被選擇之三個不同位置 藉由對第一液晶層（光射入端）施加電壓狀態（ON/OFF)及對 第二液晶層（光射出端）施加電壓狀態（ΟΝ/OFF)的組成來決 定。 圖55模型顯示對光射入端與光射出端之液晶層施加電壓 狀態時的狀態變化情況。例如，有在光射入端之液晶層上 進行或不進行施加電壓的兩種狀態，再從這些狀態藉由繼 續對光射出端的液晶層施加電壓狀態，狀態再被細分化。 此時，因光射入端處於施加電壓狀態，進入光射出端之 液晶層之光線極化面的方向轉變90 ° ，因此，與藉由光射 入端處於施加電壓狀態，對光射出端之施加電壓狀態的狀 -73- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（71 ) 態變化爲剛好相反的關係。因此，對光射入端與光射出端 之施加電壓狀態之組成的狀態變化，爲圖5 5所示的兩種組 成。 本説明書中，將上述兩種組成分別稱之爲Γ Type A」及 「Type B」。因此，三個不同子幀圖像的位置以狀態A， B，C來表示。再者，爲表示兩個液晶的施加電壓狀態，如 光射入端之液晶施加電壓狀態爲ON，光射出端施加電壓 狀態爲OFF時，則註記成Γ ON · OFF」。 此時，TypeA的Γ OFF · ON」爲狀態A，「OFF · OFF」 或「ON · OFF」爲狀態B， 「ON · ON」爲狀態C。另夕卜，Binding • k 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (70) There are double or triple images, which may cause the image quality to deteriorate significantly. Therefore, when two or more liquid crystal layers are used, and three different positions are selected in the state where voltage is applied to the liquid crystal layer, even if the transition from ON to OFF is slow, the picture needs to be driven. Mobile components that do not deteriorate. The driving method of the image moving element which has been improved so as not to cause the above problems will be described below. (15th embodiment) The image moving element of this embodiment has two elements as shown in FIG. 32 (or FIG. 33), and these two elements are arranged in series on the optical path as shown in FIG. 53. In this embodiment, a crystal plate g3 and a crystal plate g4 having birefringence are used to constitute an image moving element. With this image moving element, three different positions on the surface to be projected can be selected by applying a voltage to the two liquid crystal layers of the light entrance end and the light exit end located on the optical path. The three different positions selected are composed of a voltage state (ON / OFF) applied to the first liquid crystal layer (light emitting end) and a voltage state (ON / OFF) applied to the second liquid crystal layer (light emitting end). Decide. Fig. 55 is a model showing a state change when a voltage state is applied to the liquid crystal layer at the light entrance end and the light exit end. For example, there are two states in which a voltage is applied or not applied to the liquid crystal layer on the light input end, and the states are further subdivided from these states by applying a voltage state to the liquid crystal layer on the light output end. At this time, because the light input end is in a voltage-applied state, the direction of the polarization plane of the light entering the liquid crystal layer of the light output end is changed by 90 °. State of applied voltage -73- This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297 mm) 1227338 A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (71) State change is just the opposite relationship. Therefore, the state changes of the composition of the voltage application state to the light input end and the light output end are two kinds of components shown in FIG. In this specification, the above two components are referred to as Γ Type A "and" Type B ", respectively. Therefore, the positions of the three different sub-frame images are represented by states A, B, and C. In addition, in order to indicate the voltage application state of the two liquid crystals, if the liquid crystal application voltage state of the light input terminal is ON and the light output terminal voltage state is OFF, it is noted as Γ ON · OFF ". At this time, Γ OFF · ON of Type A is state A, "OFF · OFF" or "ON · OFF" is state B, and "ON · ON" is state C. In addition,

TypeB 的「OFF · OFF」爲狀態 A，Γ OFF · ON」或 Γ ON · 〇N」爲狀態B，「ON · OFF」爲狀態C。另外，狀態A，B 及C亦可對應於被投影面上三個不同位置的任何一個。 若Type A進行狀態Ao狀態B的變化，Type B進行狀態 B&lt;=&gt;C間的變化時。Type A於「OFF · ON」所定義的狀態A 與「ON · OFF」所定義的狀態B之間產生轉移。此外， Type B於「OFF · ON」所定義的狀態B與Γ ON · OFF」所 定義的狀態C之間產生轉移。 此時，因參照圖5 1及圖52説明之液晶的應答特性，造成 Type A在進行狀態Αθ狀態B的變化過程中，暫時存在兩液 晶層同時處於施加電壓狀態（「ΟΝ · ON」狀態）。同樣 的，Type B在進行狀態B&lt;=&gt;C間的變化過程中，暫時存在兩 液晶層同時處於施加電壓狀態（「ΟΝ · ON」狀態）。如圖 56的粗箭頭所示，「ΟΝ · ON」在Type A中定義狀態C，在 -74- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐） 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（72 )"OFF · OFF" of TypeB is state A, Γ OFF · ON "or Γ ON · ON" is state B, and "ON · OFF" is state C. In addition, states A, B, and C can also correspond to any of three different positions on the projected surface. If Type A changes state Ao and state B, Type B changes state B &lt; = &gt; C. Type A transitions between state A defined by "OFF · ON" and state B defined by "ON · OFF". In addition, Type B transitions between state B defined by "OFF · ON" and state C defined by Γ ON · OFF ". At this time, due to the response characteristics of the liquid crystal described with reference to FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, during the change of the state Aθ state B in Type A, two liquid crystal layers are temporarily in a voltage application state ("ON · ON" state) temporarily. . Similarly, during the change between Type B &lt; = &gt; C in Type B, two liquid crystal layers are temporarily in a state of voltage application ("ON · ON" state) temporarily. As shown by the thick arrow in Figure 56, "ON · ON" defines the state C in Type A, and -74- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (72)

Type B中定義狀態B。因此，Type A在進行狀態A&lt;=&gt;狀態B 的變化過程中，會暫時性的顯示有狀態A及B以外之狀態C 的子幀圖像，導致顯示品質惡化。另外，Type B在進行狀 態BoC間的變化過程中，雖會暫時性的顯示有狀態B的子 幀圖像，不過由於其在狀態Bo狀態C之變化的稍後產生， 因此並未顯示其他狀態的子幀圖像。 爲解決Type A的上述問題，於使其自狀態A轉變成狀態 B，或使其自狀態B轉變成狀態A時，若能以Γ OFF · OFF」達成狀態B時，即可防止狀態C過渡性的產生。 其次，考慮自狀態C轉變成狀態B。此時，考慮自 「ΟΝ · ON」轉變成「ON · OFF」，與自「ON · ON」轉 變成「OFF · OFF」。若考慮兩液晶層的應答特性差，則 通常宜僅改變對其中一個液晶層的施加電壓狀態。因而， 宜選擇自「ΟΝ · ON」轉變成「ON · OFF」。但是，欲以 「ON · OFF」達成狀態B時，自狀態B轉移至狀態A時會發 生上述問題。因此，自狀態C轉變成狀態B時，若再轉變成 狀態A，除以Γ OFF · OFF」達成狀態B，若狀態B以後再 度回到狀態C，則宜以「ON · OFF」達成狀態B。藉此可 以將轉移過程中的畫質惡化抑制在最低限度。 於Type B中，狀態B被Γ OFF · ON」定義時，在自狀態B 改變成狀態C，或自狀態C改變成狀態B的過程中，與Type A同樣的有「ON · ON」的狀態。-但是，如圖5 6所示，因 「ΟΝ · ON」的狀態，狀態B被達成，所以不產生如Type A 時的畫質惡化。因而採用Type B的組成時，在任何轉移過 -75- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1227338State B is defined in Type B. Therefore, in the process of changing the state A &lt; = &gt; state B, Type A will temporarily display the sub-frame images of the state C other than the states A and B, resulting in deterioration of display quality. In addition, while Type B is changing between states BoC, it will temporarily display the sub-frame image of state B. However, since it is generated later in the change of state Bo state C, no other states are displayed. Sub-frame image. In order to solve the above-mentioned problems of Type A, when transitioning from state A to state B, or from state B to state A, if state B can be achieved with Γ OFF · OFF ", state C transition can be prevented Sexuality. Second, consider the transition from state C to state B. At this time, consider changing from "ON · ON" to "ON · OFF" and changing from "ON · ON" to "OFF · OFF". Considering the poor response characteristics of the two liquid crystal layers, it is generally desirable to change the state of the voltage applied to only one of the liquid crystal layers. Therefore, you should choose to change from "ON · ON" to "ON · OFF". However, if you want to achieve state B with "ON · OFF", the above problem occurs when you transition from state B to state A. Therefore, when transitioning from state C to state B, if transitioning to state A again, divide by Γ OFF · OFF "to reach state B. If state B returns to state C again later, it is appropriate to reach state B with" ON · OFF " . This can minimize the deterioration of image quality during the transfer process. In Type B, when state B is defined by Γ OFF · ON, during the process of changing from state B to state C, or from state C to state B, there is an "ON · ON" state similar to Type A. . -However, as shown in FIG. 56, the state B is achieved due to the “ON • ON” state, so that the image quality deterioration in the case of Type A does not occur. Therefore, when using the composition of Type B, after any transfer -75- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1227338

程中都不致因應達特性差 異而產生畫質惡化 圖53所示之圖像移動元件，若具有光射入端之雙折射性 之結晶板g3與具有射出端之雙折射性之結晶板g4的關係， 馬具有正的雙折射性與負的雙折射性的關係時，即可達成 yp A亦即，如圖59所示，使光線的移動方向在光射入 端（圖中左⑷與光射出端（圖中右側）相同時，只須使在光 射入端移動的光線與在光射出端移動之光、線的極化方向保 持9〇 έ異的關係即可。另夕卜，使結晶板§3及結晶板在 先射入j與光射出端的方向一致時，T達成B。另 外，本貫施开j態之圖55的狀態A〜c對應於被投景）面上之子 幅圖像之上中下的移動位置。_ (第1 6種實施形態） 一本κ她形怨的圖像移動元件具有兩個圖％所示的元件， 這兩個元件可藉由如圖54所示的配置來獲得。 有關以施加弘壓至各液晶層的〇N ·〇ff來決定圖像移動 方向，本圖像移動元件與第15種實施形態之圖像移動元件 颂似。以下參照圖57及圖58來説明本實施形態的特徵。 ^ 7模土顯tf對光射人端與光射出端之液晶層施加電壓 狀心的狀怨·曼化情況。例如，有在光射人端之液晶層上進 :或不進行施加電壓的兩種狀態，再從這些狀態決定藉由 、廣々對光射出端的液晶層施加電壓狀態被細分化的狀態。 此處如圖52之兩液晶層之施加電壓狀態變化的變化， 在圖5 7中以粗前頭顯不。另外，在對兩液晶層施加電壓狀 態的變化過程中，料性發生0「〇Ν·⑽」狀態，在圖 1227338 A7 广 —__B7 五、發明説明（74 ) 58中以粗箭頭顯示。 從圖57及圖58中可知，本實施形態中不存在採用办…B 構造時，於狀態轉移過程中暫時性產生變化的組成。亦 即，藉由採用Type B的構造，於轉移過程中可防止其他狀 態出現，可避免導致畫質惡化。 其次’檢討子幀圖像的移動量。如上述之説明，顯示面 板之應答速度緩慢時，圖像移動與顯示圖像的切換間產生 時間偏差。產生此種時間偏差時，圖像在被投影面上被雙 重顯示。 若爲圖43的子集合1A，因圖像係逐一像素的依序向+ 丫 方向移動，僅向+ y方向移動1個像素部分的圖像僅因應應 答差被顯示。另外，若爲圖43的子集合1B，向-y方向僅移 動1個像素邵分的圖像則被重複顯示。亦即，圖像的輪廓 模糊發生在約1個像素的區域上。 另外，因子集合2A，2B，3A及3B包含兩個像素的圖像移 動，所以兩個像素部分移動的圖像分別被重複顯示。以 致’在兩個像素的區域上觀察出輪廓的模糊。子集合間縱 使產生兩個像素部分的圖像移動，同樣的會發生輪廓模 糊。 爲求抑制此種輪廓模糊現象，宜儘量減少連續顯示之子 中貞圖像間的移動量。此外，爲求解決上述因視線移動方向 及速度與子幀圖像的移動方向及移動速度概略一致所產生 的問題’宜使移動圖案之包含1週期的移動位置數量增 加0 __-77· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1227338 A7In the process, the image quality is not deteriorated due to the difference in the characteristics. If the image moving element shown in FIG. 53 has a birefringent crystal plate g3 having an incident light end and a birefringent crystal plate g4 having an outgoing end, When the horse has a relationship between positive birefringence and negative birefringence, yp A can be achieved, that is, as shown in FIG. 59, the direction of light movement is at the light entrance end (left ⑷ and light When the emitting ends (the right side in the figure) are the same, it is only necessary to maintain a 90-degree relationship between the direction of polarization of the light moving at the light emitting end and the light and line moving at the light emitting end. The crystal plate §3 and the crystal plate first enter the direction of j and the direction of the light exit end, T reaches B. In addition, the states A to c of FIG. 55 in which the j state is always applied correspond to the sub-planes on the projected scene The moving position of the image above and below. _ (16th Embodiment) A kappa-shaped image moving element has two elements shown in Fig.%, And these two elements can be obtained by a configuration as shown in FIG. 54. The image moving element is similar to the image moving element of the fifteenth embodiment in that the image moving direction is determined by applying 0N · ff to each liquid crystal layer. The features of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. ^ 7 mold soil display tf applies a voltage to the liquid crystal layer at the light emitting end and the light emitting end. For example, there are two states of advancing on the liquid crystal layer of the light emitting end: or no voltage is applied, and from these states, the state of subdividing the state of applying a voltage to the liquid crystal layer of the light emitting end is determined by. Here, the change of the applied voltage state of the two liquid crystal layers as shown in FIG. 52 is shown in thick front in FIG. In addition, during the change in the state of applying voltage to the two liquid crystal layers, the state of "0N · ⑽" occurs in the material properties, which is shown by thick arrows in Fig. 1227338 A7-—_B7 V. Description of the invention (74) 58. As can be seen from FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, in the present embodiment, there is no composition that temporarily changes during the state transition process when the structure… B is adopted. That is, by adopting the structure of Type B, it is possible to prevent other states from appearing during the transfer process, and to prevent the deterioration of the image quality. Secondly, the amount of movement of the sub-frame image is reviewed. As described above, when the response speed of the display panel is slow, a time deviation occurs between the image movement and the display image switching. When such a time offset occurs, the image is displayed double on the projected surface. If it is the sub-set 1A of FIG. 43, the image is sequentially moved in the + y direction one pixel by one pixel, and the image moved by only one pixel portion in the + y direction is displayed only in response to poor response. In addition, if it is the subset 1B of FIG. 43, an image shifted by only one pixel in the -y direction is repeatedly displayed. That is, the contour blur of the image occurs over a region of about 1 pixel. In addition, the factor sets 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B include image movements of two pixels, so the images of two pixel portion movements are repeatedly displayed, respectively. As a result, the blur of the outline is observed on the area of two pixels. Even if the image between two sub-sets is moved between sub-sets, the same contour blur will occur. In order to suppress this kind of contour blurring, it is advisable to minimize the amount of movement between the images of the children in the continuous display. In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems caused by the line of sight moving direction and speed being roughly consistent with the moving direction and moving speed of the sub-frame image, 'the number of moving positions including one cycle of the moving pattern should be increased by 0 __- 77 · This paper Standards apply to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1227338 A7

1227338 A7 ________B7 五、發明説明（76 ) 態。 (第1 7種實施形態） 本實施形態之投影型圖像顯示裝置，基本上具有與第工 種實施形態同樣的構造，主要差異在於採用適於獲得更鮮 明圖像之子幀圖像的移動圖案。因此，以下僅説明其差異 部分。 a 第1種實施形態，如圖12所示的，具有3個構成第η+ι (η 爲正整數）幀圖像的子幀圖像，使其移動的方向與使構成 第η幀圖像之子幀圖像的移動方向相同，但是本實施形 態，則與第13種實施形態同樣的，將子幀圖像之移動圖案 以6個子幀圖像作爲1週期。第13種實施形態中，藉由如圖 44所示的組合子集合1Α與子集合⑶，構成i週期的移動圖 案。以致，該移動圖案的}週期包含兩次（+y方向與·γ方 向的兩次）2個像素部分的移動。 而本貫施形態則是採用圖62所示的移動圖案。該移動圖 案的1週期，6個子幀圖像以移動同一直線上之四個位置的 圖案所構成，此外，各移動的大小爲丨個像素部分。 圖62所示的移動圖案，在對應之傅里葉空間中，.與圖44 之私動圖案等效。因而，圖62所示之移動圖案的頻譜局部 ”’古與圖42(b)所示的相同。亦即，本實施形態可以獲得第 1 3種實施形態的效果。再者，本實施形態還可獲得輪廓摻 色自± 2像素部分減半至土 1像素部分的效果。另外縱使1 悄刀割成2個或3個子幀時，仍可採用圖62的移動圖案。 用於執行此種移動圖案的一種圖像移動元件範例如圖631227338 A7 ________B7 V. Description of invention (76) status. (17th embodiment) The projection-type image display device of this embodiment basically has the same structure as that of the first embodiment, and the main difference is that it uses a moving pattern suitable for obtaining a sharper image of a sub-frame image. Therefore, only the differences are explained below. a The first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, has three sub-frame images constituting the η + ι (η is a positive integer) frame image, the direction in which it moves and the η-th frame image. The moving direction of the sub-frame image is the same, but in this embodiment, the moving pattern of the sub-frame image is the same as that of the thirteenth embodiment, and the six sub-frame images are used as one cycle. In the thirteenth embodiment, a sub-set 1A and a sub-set CU are combined as shown in Fig. 44 to form a moving pattern of the i period. Therefore, the} period of the movement pattern includes two pixel part movements (twice in the + y direction and · γ direction). In this embodiment, the moving pattern shown in FIG. 62 is used. In one cycle of the moving pattern, six sub-frame images are composed of a pattern that moves four positions on the same straight line. In addition, the size of each movement is 丨 pixel portions. The moving pattern shown in FIG. 62 is equivalent to the private moving pattern in FIG. 44 in the corresponding Fourier space. Therefore, the “partial spectrum” of the moving pattern shown in FIG. 62 is the same as that shown in FIG. 42 (b). That is, this embodiment can obtain the effects of the thirteenth embodiment. Furthermore, this embodiment also The effect of halving the outline color from ± 2 pixels to 1 pixel can be obtained. In addition, even if 1 is cut into 2 or 3 sub-frames, the moving pattern of FIG. 62 can still be used. An example of a pattern moving image is shown in Figure 63

1227338 A7 ___Β7 五、發明説明（77 ) 所示。該圖像移動元件具備玻璃板22e，其具有透明區域 A〜F。玻璃材料僅使用廉價的bk7玻璃，透明區域a的厚 度爲0.7 mm，透明區域B及F的厚度爲1.4 mm，透明區域c 及E的厚度爲2.1 mm，透明區域D的厚度爲2·8 mm。各透明 區域的折射率均爲1.5 2。 將此種構造之圓盤狀玻璃板22e的主面對光軸形成83.8。 的角度。因而，使各透明區域橫切光程的時間與切換成對 應其之子幀的時間同步，旋轉玻璃板22e。藉此，透明區 域B對透明區域A及F ’光程僅移動2 6 · 0 a m，透明區域c及 E對透明區域B及F，光程僅移動2 6 · 0 &quot; m，透明區域D對透 明區域C及E ’光程僅移動2 6 · 0 # ~m。 透明區域A，例如對應於圖44所示之最初子幀，此時， 透明區域B對應於下一個子幀，透明區域c以後也依序對 應。 當然，圖像顯示元件亦可使用其他實施形態中記載的圖 像移動元件。 另外，本實施形態係採用圖46的像素排列作爲圖像顯示 面板的像素排列。與第1 3種實施形態同樣的，縱使視線移 動與子幀圖像移動概略一致，能辨識出圖像顯示面板的像 素排列，卻對畫質的不良影響更少。 採用本貫施形怨之投影型圖像顯示裝置，也因使用無彩 色滤光器之圖像顯示面板’在各ψ貞期間生成3個子ψ貞圖 像，使這些圖像進行光學性移動、合成，所以與使用先前 之彩色滤光器之單板式投影型圖像顯示裝置比較，可大幅 -80- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) Ϊ227338 A7 B71227338 A7 ___ Β7 V. Description of the invention (77). This image moving element includes a glass plate 22e having transparent areas A to F. The glass material only uses cheap bk7 glass. The thickness of transparent area a is 0.7 mm, the thickness of transparent areas B and F is 1.4 mm, the thickness of transparent areas c and E is 2.1 mm, and the thickness of transparent area D is 2.8 mm. . The refractive index of each transparent region was 1.5 2. The optical axis of the main surface of the disc-shaped glass plate 22e having such a structure was 83.8. Angle. Therefore, the time of the transversal optical path of each transparent region is synchronized with the time of switching to the corresponding sub-frame, and the glass plate 22e is rotated. As a result, the optical path of the transparent region B moves only 2 6 · 0 am to the transparent regions A and F ', and the transparent region c and E moves to the transparent regions B and F, and the optical path moves only 2 6 · 0 &quot; m, the transparent region D For the transparent areas C and E ', the optical path is moved only by 2 6 · 0 # ~ m. The transparent area A corresponds to, for example, the first sub-frame shown in FIG. 44. At this time, the transparent area B corresponds to the next sub-frame, and the transparent area c also corresponds sequentially in the future. Of course, the image display device may use the image moving device described in the other embodiments. In this embodiment, the pixel arrangement of FIG. 46 is adopted as the pixel arrangement of the image display panel. Similar to the thirteenth embodiment, although the line-of-sight movement is roughly consistent with the sub-frame image movement, the pixel arrangement of the image display panel can be recognized, but it has less adverse effect on the image quality. Adopting a projection-type image display device that is inherently resentful, the image display panel using an achromatic filter also generates three child images during each period, and these images are optically moved, Compared with the single-plate projection image display device using the previous color filter, it can be substantially -80- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) Ϊ227338 A7 B7

五、發明説明（ 提高光使用率，且可達到3倍的解像度。當然，亦可在各 幀期間生成2個子幀圖像，使這些圖像進行光學性移動、 a成雖Λ、：動旦中有右干移動不順暢，但因這個部分的子 幀切換率緩慢，所以液晶充分應答，可獲得更佳穿透率狀 怨。再者，還可抑制因圖像移動與子幀切換之間產生之時 間偏差而造成之圖像輪廓丨個像素部分以内的摻色。 (第1 8種實施形態） 本貫施形怨之投影型圖像顯示裝置，基本上也具有與第 1 7種實施形態同樣的構造，主要差異在於子幀圖像的移動 圖案。因此，以下僅説明其差異部分。 第17種實施形態，如圖62所示的，子幀圖像之移動圖案 的1週期以6個子幀圖像構成，而本實施形態則如圖。所 示，子幀圖像之移動圖案的丨週期以丨2個子幀圖像構成。 圖63之移動圖案的傅里葉空間狀態與圖62之移動圖案的 傅^葉空間狀態相比，其局部點更加分散。因此，本實施 形悲比第1 7種實施形態，更不易發生因特定之視線移動速 度造成上述的現象。 本實施形態使用之子幀圖像的移動圖案，由於在子幀間 不移動的圖案，必定是從偶數子幀到奇數子幀，因此，以 2個子幀構成1幀，或是以3個子幀構成均可。 適用於本實施形態的一種圖像移動元件範例如圖50所 孩圖像移動元件具備破璃板22k，其具有透明區域Α〜L。 玻璃材料僅使用廉價的BK7玻璃，透明區域A，L的厚度爲 -81- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格（210X297公釐） 1227338 A7 _______ B7 五、發明説明（79 ) 0.7 mm，透明區域B及B，D，I，K的厚度爲1.4 mm，透明 區域C，E，Η，J的厚度爲2.1 mm，透明區域F，G的厚度爲 2.8 mm。各透明區域的折射率均爲1.52。 將此種構造之圓盤狀玻璃板22k的主面對光軸形成83.8。 的角度。因而，使各透明區域橫切光程的時間與切換成對 應其之子幀的時間同步，旋轉玻璃板22k。藉此，透明區 域B，D，I，K對透明區域A，L，光程僅移動26.0 a m，透 明區域C，E，Η，J對透明區域b，d，I，K，光程僅移動 26.0// m，透明區域F，G對透明區域C，Ε，Η，J，光程僅 移動 2 6.0 a m。 透明區域A，例如對應於圖49所示之最初子幀，此時， 透明區域B對應於下一個子幀，透明區域c以後也依序對 應。 (圖像移動元件第二種改良例） 其次説明圖像移動元件的其他改良例。 如上所述，具有液晶層的圖像移動元件爲同樣適用於畫 面統一寫入方式之圖像顯示面板與線掃瞄方式之圖像顯示 面板的圖像移動元件。 子幀圖像的位置在被投影面内之同一直線上的三處移動 時，如上所述，只須2個圖像移動元件直接排列在光軸 上’各個圖像移動元件的移動量概略一致即可。 另外，子幀圖像的位置在被投影面内之同一直線上的四 處移動時，只須設定成上述2個圖像移動元件的移動量不 同即可。 -8 2 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（80 ) 以下説明此種圖像移動元件的驅動方法。 (第1 9種實施形態） 本實施形態的圖像移動元件，可以使子幀圖像的位置在 被投影面内之同一直線上的四處逐一像素移動，適用於達 成圖62及圖64的移動圖案。該圖像移動元件具有2個圖 32(或圖33)所示的元件，可藉由將這2個元件如圖53所示的 串聯排列在光程上，改變各圖像移動量來獲得。 本實施形態因使用具有雙折射性的結晶板g3及結晶板g4 構成圖像移動元件，所以只要改變這些結晶板的厚度，即 可改變圖像移動量。採用該圖像移動元件，藉由使位於光 程上之光射入端與光射出端的兩-個液晶層處於施加電壓狀 態，可以選擇被投影面上四個不同位置。被選擇之四個不 同位置，係藉由組合對第一液晶層（光射入端）之施加電壓 狀態（ON/OFF)及對第二液晶層（光射出端）之施加電壓狀態 (ΟΝ/OFF)來決定。 此時的移動態樣視光射入端之圖像移動量比光射出端之 圖像移動量大或小而異。光射入端之圖像移動量相對較大 時，如圖6 5所示，光射出端之圖像移動量相對較大時，如 圖66所示。圖65及圖66模型顯示對光射入端與光射出端之 液晶層施加電壓狀態的狀態變化情況。例如，有在光射入 端之液晶層上進行或不進行施加電壓的兩種狀態，再從這 些狀態藉由繼續對光射出端的液晶層施加電壓狀態，狀態 再被細分化。 此時，因光射入端處於施加電壓狀態，進入光射出端之 -83- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（81 ) 液晶層之光線極化面的方向轉變90 ° ，因此，與藉由光射 入端處於施加電壓狀態，對光射出端之施加電壓狀態的狀 態變化爲剛好相反的關係。因此，對光射入端與光射出端 之施加電壓狀態之組成的狀態變化，爲圖65及圖66之各個 上下所示的兩種組成。 此處亦將上述兩種組成分別稱之爲「Type A」及「Type B」。因此，四個不同子幀圖像的位置以狀態A，B，C，D 來表示。再者，爲表示兩個液晶的施加電壓狀態，如光射 入端之液晶施加電壓狀態爲ON，光射出端施加電壓狀態 爲OFF時，則註記成Γ ON · OFF」。 此時，圖65中之Type A的「- OFF · ON」爲狀態A， 「OFF · OFF」爲狀態B，「ON · OFF」爲狀態C，「ON · ON」爲狀態D。另外，TypeB的Γ OFF · OFF」爲狀態A， 「OFF · ON」爲狀態B， 「ON · ON」爲狀態C， 「ON · OFF」爲狀態D。另外，狀態A，B，C及D亦可對應於被投 影面上同'一直線上之四個不同位置的任何一個。圖6 6時亦 可同樣的考慮。 考慮狀態自「ON · OFF」轉變成「OFF · ON」，或狀態 自「OFF · ON」轉變成Γ ON · OFF」。圖65例中，藉由狀 態自「ON · OFF」轉變成「OFF · ON」，或狀態自 「OFF · ON」轉變成Γ ON · OFF」，在Type A中對應於狀 態Ao狀態C的變化，在Type B中對應於狀態Bo狀態D的變 化。同樣的，於圖66的例中，上述的狀態變化則爲，在 Type A中對應於狀態A«狀態B的變化，在Type B中對應於 -84- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1227338 A7V. Description of the invention (Improve the light utilization rate, and can reach 3 times the resolution. Of course, it is also possible to generate 2 sub-frame images during each frame, so that these images are optically moved. In the center, the right stem movement is not smooth, but because the sub-frame switching rate in this part is slow, the LCD fully responds and can get better penetration. Also, it can suppress the gap between image movement and sub-frame switching. The image contour caused by the time deviation caused by color mixing within a pixel portion. (18th embodiment) The projection type image display device, which has always been shaped, basically has the same implementation as the 17th embodiment. The structure with the same shape is mainly different in the moving pattern of the sub-frame image. Therefore, only the differences will be described below. In the 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, one period of the moving pattern of the sub-frame image is 6 The sub-frame image is composed, and this embodiment is shown in the figure. As shown, the period of the moving pattern of the sub-frame image is composed of 2 sub-frame images. The Fourier space state of the moving pattern in FIG. 63 and FIG. 62 Fu ^ ye space of moving pattern Compared with the state, its local points are more scattered. Therefore, compared with the 17th embodiment, this embodiment is less likely to cause the above-mentioned phenomenon due to a specific line of sight movement speed. The movement pattern of the sub-frame image used in this embodiment, Since a pattern that does not move between subframes must be from an even subframe to an odd subframe, it may be composed of 2 subframes or 1 or 3 subframes. An image suitable for this embodiment An example of a moving element is shown in Figure 50. The moving element is equipped with a broken glass plate 22k, which has transparent areas A to L. The glass material uses only cheap BK7 glass, and the thickness of the transparent area A and L is -81- This paper size is applicable China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 1227338 A7 _______ B7 V. Description of the invention (79) 0.7 mm, thickness of transparent area B and B, D, I, K is 1.4 mm, transparent area C, E, That is, the thickness of J is 2.1 mm, the thickness of transparent area F, and G is 2.8 mm. The refractive index of each transparent area is 1.52. The main surface of the disc-shaped glass plate 22k of this structure is 83.8 to the optical axis. Angle. Therefore, make each through The time of the cross-section of the area is synchronized with the time of switching to the corresponding sub-frame, and the glass plate is rotated 22k. With this, the transparent areas B, D, I, and K are transparent to the transparent areas A and L, and the optical distance is only 26.0 am, transparent. Areas C, E, Η, and J are transparent areas b, d, I, and K, and the optical path is shifted by only 26.0 // m, and transparent areas F and G are through the transparent areas C, E, Η, and J, and the optical path are moved by only 2 6.0. am. Transparent area A corresponds, for example, to the first sub-frame shown in FIG. 49. At this time, transparent area B corresponds to the next sub-frame, and transparent area c also corresponds sequentially. (The second modified example of the image moving element ) Next, another modified example of the image moving element will be described. As described above, the image moving element having a liquid crystal layer is an image moving element which is also suitable for an image display panel of a uniform writing method of a screen and an image display panel of a line scanning method. When the position of the sub-frame image is moved at three places on the same straight line in the projected plane, as described above, only two image moving elements need to be arranged directly on the optical axis. Just fine. In addition, when the positions of the sub-frame images are moved around on the same straight line in the projection plane, it is only necessary to set the movement amounts of the two image moving elements to be different. -8 2-This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (80) The driving method of this type of image moving element will be described below. (19th Embodiment) The image moving element according to this embodiment can move the position of a sub-frame image on a same line in the projected plane, one pixel at a time, and is suitable for achieving the movement of FIGS. 62 and 64. pattern. This image moving element has two elements shown in FIG. 32 (or FIG. 33), which can be obtained by arranging the two elements in series on the optical path as shown in FIG. 53 and changing the amount of each image movement. In this embodiment, since the crystal plate g3 and the crystal plate g4 having birefringence are used to constitute the image moving element, the amount of image movement can be changed by changing the thickness of these crystal plates. With this image moving element, by placing two or more liquid crystal layers on the light entrance end and the light exit end of the optical path in a state of applying a voltage, four different positions on the projected surface can be selected. The four different positions selected are the voltage applied state (ON / OFF) to the first liquid crystal layer (light emitting end) and the voltage applied state (0N / OFF). The movement state at this time varies depending on whether the amount of image movement at the light entrance end is larger or smaller than the amount of image movement at the light exit end. When the amount of image movement at the light emitting end is relatively large, as shown in Fig. 65, and when the amount of image movement at the light emitting end is relatively large, as shown in Fig. 66. The models in Fig. 65 and Fig. 66 show changes in the state of applying a voltage to the liquid crystal layer at the light entrance end and the light exit end. For example, there are two states in which a voltage is applied or not applied to the liquid crystal layer at the light input end, and the states are further subdivided by continuing to apply a voltage state to the liquid crystal layer at the light output end. At this time, because the light input end is in a state of voltage application, it enters the light output end. -83- The paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1227338 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (81) The direction of the plane of polarization of the light of the liquid crystal layer changes by 90 °. Therefore, the state of the voltage applied to the light emitting end is changed in exactly the opposite relation with the state of the voltage applied to the light incident end. Therefore, the state changes of the composition of the voltage-applied end and the light-exited end are the two compositions shown above and below each of FIG. 65 and FIG. 66. The above two components are also referred to herein as "Type A" and "Type B". Therefore, the positions of the four different sub-frame images are represented by states A, B, C, and D. In addition, in order to indicate the voltage application state of the two liquid crystals, if the liquid crystal application voltage state of the light input terminal is ON and the voltage output state of the light output terminal is OFF, it is noted as Γ ON · OFF ". At this time, "-OFF · ON" of Type A in Fig. 65 is state A, "OFF · OFF" is state B, "ON · OFF" is state C, and "ON · ON" is state D. In addition, Γ OFF · OFF of TypeB is state A, "OFF · ON" is state B, "ON · ON" is state C, and "ON · OFF" is state D. In addition, states A, B, C, and D may also correspond to any of four different positions on the same plane of the projected surface. Figure 6-6 can also be considered the same. Consider the state transition from "ON · OFF" to "OFF · ON", or the state transition from "OFF · ON" to Γ ON · OFF ". In the example in Fig. 65, the state changes from "ON · OFF" to "OFF · ON", or from "OFF · ON" to Γ ON · OFF ", corresponding to the change of state Ao and state C in Type A. , In Type B corresponds to the change in state Bo state D. Similarly, in the example in FIG. 66, the above-mentioned state change is corresponding to the change of state A «state B in Type A, and -84 in Type B. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) 1227338 A7

狀態C&lt;=&gt;狀態D的變化。 從以上的考察可知，圖65例中，藉由狀態自「〇n · OFF」轉變成r0FF · 0N」，或狀態自「〇ff · 〇N」轉變 成「ON· OFF」，進行2個像素部分的移動。另外，圖^ 例中，藉由狀態自ΓΟΝ· 0FF」轉變成「〇FF· 〇Ν」 狀態自「OFF· ON」轉變成「〇Ν· 〇FF」，進行丨個像^ 部分的移動。 ' 因圖62及圖64之移動圖案的圖像移動量爲i個像素部 分，所以圖65的構造不產生狀態自「〇N. 〇FF」轉變成 「OFF . ON」，及狀態自「〇FF . 〇N」轉變成「〇n · OFF」。因而可以避免因圖像㈣元件之應答緩慢所造成 的問題。 採用圖53所示之圖像移動元料，若具有光射入端之雙 折射性之結晶板g3與具有射出端之雙折射性之結晶板以的 關係’爲具有正的雙折射性與負的雙折射性的關係時，即 可達成Type A。亦即，如圖59所示，使光線的移動方向在 光射入端（圖中左側）與光射出端（圖中右側）相同時，只須 使在光射入端移動的光線與在光射出端移動之光線的極化 方向保持9&quot;異的關係即可。另外，使結晶板g3及結晶 板g4在光射入端與光射出端的方向—致時，可達成办… B 〇 再者，若使結晶板g3與g4的厚度爲2 ·· }的關係，則各個 圖像移動tl件的圖像移動量即爲2 ·· i。如此，圖65及圖66 之移動位置A，B，C，D爲等間隔，可以丨個像素間距移 -85- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公袭) 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（83 ) 動0 (第2 0種實施形態） 本實施形態的圖像移動元件也與第1 6種實施形態同樣的 具有兩個圖3 6所示的元件，這兩個元件藉由圖5 4所示的配 置獲得。 有關藉由對各液晶層施加電壓的ON · OFF，以決定圖像 移動方向方面，本圖像移動元件與第1 5種圖像移動元件類 似。以下參照圖67及圖68説明本實施形態的特徵。 圖67模型顯示對光射入端與光射出端之液晶層施加電壓 狀態的狀態變化情況。例如，有在光射入端之液晶層上進 行或不進行施加電壓的兩種狀態，再從這些狀態決定藉由 繼續對光射出端的液晶層施加電壓狀態被細分化的狀態。 此時也考慮自「ON · OFF」轉變成Γ OFF · ON」，或狀 態自「OFF · ON」轉變成Γ ON · OFF」。圖67例中，藉由 狀態自「ON · OFF」轉變成Γ OFF · ON」，或狀態自 「OFF · ON」轉變成Γ ON · OFF」，在Type A中產生狀態 Bo狀態C的變化，在Type B中產生狀態A&lt;=&gt;狀態D的變化。 同樣的，於圖68的例中，藉由上述的狀態變化，在Type A 中產生狀態6&lt;=&gt;狀態C的變化，在Type B中產生狀態A&lt;=&gt;狀 態D的變化。 從以上可知，圖67及圖68的例中，Type A中，1個像素部 分的移動即產生狀態自「ON · _OFF」轉變成Γ OFF · ON」，或狀態自「OFF · ON」轉變成Γ ON · OFF」，但 是Type B中，僅在進行3個像素部分的移動時，才產生狀 -86- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1227338 A7 B7 五、發明説明（84 ) 態自「ON · OFF」轉變成「OFF · ON」，或狀態自 「OFF · ON」轉變成「ON · OFF」。 採用圖62及圖64之移動圖案時，因圖像移動量爲1個像 素部分，若採用Type B的構造，在轉移過程中可以防止出 現其他狀態，可避免導致畫質惡化。 以上係針對使用液晶顯示元件（LCD)作爲圖像顯示面板 的投影型圖像顯示裝置，來説明本發明的各種實施形態， 不過本發明並不限定於此。本發明亦可適用於將液晶顯示 元件以外的顯示元件，如數位微型反射鏡裝置（Digital Micromirror Device，DMD)等用在圖像顯示面板上的投影型 圖像顯示裝置。 - 此外，本發明亦可適用於直視型的圖像顯示裝置。此 時’亦可使用以彩色濾光器進行全色彩顯示型式的圖像顯 不面板。不使用成像用之光學系統的一般直視型裝置，雖 然不需要螢幕等被投影面，不過經由接眼鏡來觀察圖像的 直視型裝置時，眼睛視網膜即發揮圖像之被投影面的功 能。 再者’本發明亦可適用於不需要特別光源，使用自發光 型之圖像顯示元件作爲圖像顯示面板之直視型或投影型的 圖像顯示裝置。 此外’以上係以藉由折射構件使光程週期性改變的元件 爲例，來說明圖像移動元件的實施形態，不過，亦可使光 源或光學系統的至少一部分移動，藉此改變光程。例如， 使圖1所tf之投影透鏡丨丨振動，圖像即可移動。State C &lt; = &gt; Change in state D. From the above investigation, it can be seen that in the example of FIG. 65, the state is changed from "On · OFF" to "r0FF · 0N", or the status from "〇ff · On" to "ON · OFF", and two pixels are performed. Part of the movement. In addition, in the example of Figure ^, the state is changed from ΓΟΝ · 0FF "to" 〇FF · ON ", and the state is changed from" OFF · ON "to" 〇Ν · 〇FF ", so that one image ^ is moved. 'Because the image movement amount of the movement patterns of FIG. 62 and FIG. 64 is i pixel portion, the structure of FIG. 65 does not generate a state from "ON. FF" to "OFF. ON", and the status from "〇. "FF. ON" turns into "ON · OFF". Therefore, problems caused by the slow response of the image element can be avoided. Using the image moving element shown in FIG. 53, if the crystal plate g3 having birefringence at the light entrance end and the crystal plate having birefringence at the exit end are related to each other, the relationship is positive birefringence and negative Type A can be achieved when the birefringence relationship is reached. That is, as shown in FIG. 59, when the light moving direction is the same at the light entrance end (left side in the figure) and the light exit end (right side in the figure), it is only necessary to make the light moving at the light entrance end and the light The polarization direction of the light moving at the exit end can be maintained in a 9 &quot; different relationship. In addition, when the crystal plate g3 and the crystal plate g4 are aligned in the directions of the light entrance end and the light exit end, it can be achieved ... B 〇 Furthermore, if the thickness of the crystal plates g3 and g4 is 2 ··}, Then the image movement amount of each image movement t1 is 2 ·· i. In this way, the moving positions A, B, C, and D of Figure 65 and Figure 66 are equally spaced, and can be shifted by a pixel pitch of -85. V. Description of the invention (83) Motion 0 (20th embodiment) The image moving element of this embodiment has the same two components as shown in FIG. 36 as in the 16th embodiment. Obtained with the configuration shown in Figure 54. This image moving element is similar to the 15th type of image moving element in that it determines the image moving direction by turning ON and OFF a voltage to each liquid crystal layer. The features of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figs. 67 and 68. Fig. 67 is a model showing the state change of the voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer at the light input end and the light output end. For example, there are two states in which a voltage is applied or not applied to the liquid crystal layer at the light input end, and then these states are determined to be subdivided by continuing to apply a voltage to the liquid crystal layer at the light output end. At this time, it is also considered to change from "ON · OFF" to Γ OFF · ON ", or the state from" OFF · ON "to Γ ON · OFF". In the example in FIG. 67, the state changes from "ON · OFF" to Γ OFF · ON ", or from" OFF · ON "to Γ ON · OFF", resulting in a change in state Bo state C in Type A. A change in state A &lt; = &gt; state D occurs in Type B. Similarly, in the example shown in FIG. 68, a change in state 6 &lt; = &gt; state C occurs in Type A and a change in state A &lt; = &gt; state D occurs in Type B by the state change described above. As can be seen from the above, in the examples of FIGS. 67 and 68, in Type A, the movement of one pixel portion causes the state to change from "ON · _OFF" to Γ OFF · ON ", or the state from" OFF · ON "to Γ ON · OFF ", but in Type B, it occurs only when moving three pixels. -86- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1227338 A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (84) The state changes from "ON · OFF" to "OFF · ON", or the state changes from "OFF · ON" to "ON · OFF". When the moving patterns in Fig. 62 and Fig. 64 are used, since the moving amount of the image is one pixel portion, if the structure of Type B is used, other states can be prevented during the transfer process, and the deterioration of image quality can be avoided. The foregoing has described various embodiments of the present invention with respect to a projection-type image display device using a liquid crystal display element (LCD) as an image display panel, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The present invention can also be applied to a projection type image display device using a display element other than a liquid crystal display element, such as a digital micromirror device (DMD), on an image display panel. -In addition, the present invention is also applicable to a direct-view image display device. At this time, an image display panel of a full color display type using a color filter may be used. A general direct-view type device that does not use an optical system for imaging does not require a projected surface such as a screen. However, in a direct-view type device that uses glasses to observe an image, the retina of the eye functions as the projected surface of the image. Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a direct-view type or projection-type image display device that does not require a special light source and uses a self-emission type image display element as an image display panel. In addition, the above description is based on an example in which an optical path is periodically changed by a refractive member to describe an embodiment of an image moving element. However, at least a part of a light source or an optical system may be moved to change the optical path. For example, by vibrating the projection lens tf shown in FIG. 1, the image can be moved.

1227338 A7 _____B7 五、發明説明（85 ) (第2 1種實施形態） 第1 1種實施形態之投影型圖像顯示裝置的系統構造爲三 個子幀記憶體分別記憶三種顏色的相關資料。第丨丨種實施 形態中，縱使由2個子幀構成各幀，因始終三種顏色的圖 像資料係儲存在幀記憶體内，因此需要三個子幢記憶體。 本實施形態則是採用由2個子幀構成各幀時，可使記憶體 之使用效率增加的系統。 以下參照圖69説明本發明之投影型圖像顯示裝置的系統 構造範例。 本實施形態主要也包含：影像信號處理電路1〇〇、照明 光學系統（光源等）1〇2、圖像-顯示面板（液晶顯示元 件）104、圖像移動元件106、圖像移動元件控制電路1〇8、 及投影透鏡110。 由於照明光學系統102、圖像顯示面板1 〇4、圖像移動元 件106、及投影透鏡110已經説明過，以下以影像信號處理 電路100及圖像移動元件控制電路108爲中心之各構成元件 的關係，係同於實施形態1 1。 本實施形態之影像信號處理電路100包含：輸入信號選 擇電路120、影像解調電路122、Y/C分離電路124、掃瞒電 路126、幀速轉換電路128 '系統控制電路132、色彩信號 選擇電路1340、及幀記憶體電路1300。 系統控制電路132控制輸入信號選擇電路120、色彩信號 選擇電路13 4 0、t貞記憶體13 0 0、及圖像移動元件控制電路 10 8的操作。 -88- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 1227338 A7 ^ __ B7 ^、發明説明（1θ~~r 一 ' 圖像移動元件控制電路108依據系統控制電路132所輸出 的信號，與子幢圖像的顯示同步，控制圖像移動元件106 的操作。 本實施形態與第U種實施形態之間的主要差異在於轉記 憶體電路13〇〇及色彩信號選擇電路134〇的構造，以下説明 這個部分。 本實施形態藉由圖69所示之色彩信號選擇電路l34〇，r 信號、G信號及信號以適切的順序被儲存在悄記憶體電路 1300内。圖像顯示面板104依據幀記憶體電路13〇〇送出的 資料顯示子幀圖像。 對鴨記憶體的寫入信號率（頻率fin)雖與輸入信號有關， 不過自幀記憶體的讀出信號率（頻率£〇11〇則受本系統之時 鉍喪、率所疋我。如頻率fln爲6〇赫茲（Hz)，如頻率化…爲18〇 Hz 〇 因應自系統控制電路132所輸出之控制信號，R信號、G 信號、B信號被儲存在數個幀記憶體内。此時，本實施形 怨的1幀由2個子幀構成時，只須具備2個幀記憶體即可， 不需要第3個幀記憶體。 这些k號的讀出率爲上述的f〇ut，在各幀期間，自各幀 記憶體的讀出操作反覆執行2〜3次。1227338 A7 _____B7 V. Description of the invention (85) (21st embodiment) The system of the projection image display device of the 11th embodiment is structured by three sub-frame memories to store relevant data of three colors, respectively. In the first implementation form, even if each frame is composed of two sub-frames, the image data of three colors is always stored in the frame memory, so three sub-frame memories are required. This embodiment is a system which can increase the memory use efficiency when each frame is composed of two sub-frames. An example of the system configuration of a projection type image display device of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG. This embodiment also mainly includes an image signal processing circuit 100, an illumination optical system (light source, etc.) 102, an image-display panel (liquid crystal display element) 104, an image moving element 106, and an image moving element control circuit. 108 and the projection lens 110. Since the illumination optical system 102, the image display panel 104, the image moving element 106, and the projection lens 110 have already been described, the following description will focus on the constituent elements of the image signal processing circuit 100 and the image moving element control circuit 108. The relationship is the same as that of Embodiment 11. The image signal processing circuit 100 of this embodiment includes an input signal selection circuit 120, an image demodulation circuit 122, a Y / C separation circuit 124, a concealment circuit 126, a frame rate conversion circuit 128, a system control circuit 132, and a color signal selection circuit. 1340, and frame memory circuit 1300. The system control circuit 132 controls the operations of the input signal selection circuit 120, the color signal selection circuit 13 4 0, the memory 13 0 0, and the image moving element control circuit 108. -88- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) 1227338 A7 ^ __ B7 ^ Description of the invention (1θ ~~ r- 'Image moving element control circuit 108 according to the system control circuit 132 The output signal is synchronized with the display of the sub-frame image and controls the operation of the image moving element 106. The main difference between this embodiment and the U-th embodiment lies in the transfer memory circuit 1300 and the color signal selection circuit. The structure of 134 ° is described below. In this embodiment, the color signal selection circuit 134, shown in FIG. 69, and the r signal, G signal, and signal are stored in the memory circuit 1300 in an appropriate order. Image The display panel 104 displays a sub-frame image based on the data sent by the frame memory circuit 1300. Although the write signal rate (frequency fin) to the duck memory is related to the input signal, the read signal rate from the frame memory ( The frequency of 〇0101 is affected by the bismuth loss and the rate of the system at the time. If the frequency fln is 60Hz (Hz), if the frequency is… 18Hz, it will respond to the control signal output from the system control circuit 132. , R letter The G, G, and B signals are stored in several frame memories. At this time, when one frame in this embodiment is composed of two subframes, only two frame memories are required, and the third frame is not required. Memory. The readout rate of these k numbers is fout, as described above, during each frame period, the readout operation from each frame memory is repeatedly performed 2 to 3 times.

第11種貫施形悲在將各色信號儲存於合計3個的幀記憶 體後，藉由色彩信號選擇電路134，自3個幀記憶體依序讀 出所1¾仏號，生成各子幀圖像。但是，上述之本實施形態 則係藉由色彩信號選擇電路1340，將各色信號映ZIn the eleventh embodiment, after storing each color signal in a total of three frame memories, the color signal selection circuit 134 sequentially reads the numbers 1¾ 仏 from the three frame memories to generate each sub-frame image. image. However, in this embodiment described above, each color signal is mapped to Z by the color signal selection circuit 1340.

1227338 A7 __B7 五、發明説明（87 ) (Mapping)在幀記憶體電路13〇〇上，各子幀圖像儲存在對應 的幀記憶體内。？己憶在各幀記憶體内之子幀圖像的資料依 序被讀出。 如上所述，1幀由2個子幀構成時，若採用第丨丨種實施形 態的方式，由於與包含在丨幀内之子幀數量無關，儲存各 幀全部的貝料，所以需要各色信號用之合計3個幀記憶 體。但是，採用本實施形態時，由於係對幀記憶體直接映 射子幀圖像，所以只須將必要的子幀圖像資料儲存在幀記 憶體内即可。以致，1幀由2個子幀構成時，具有幀記憶體 的數量或记憶體容量爲第Π種實施形態之3分之2的優點。 (第2 2種實施形態） _ 其次，以至少具有一組液晶元件及雙折射元件之組合的 圖像移動元件爲例，來説明圖像的較佳移動方向。 爲使用圖2所示之微型透鏡陣列的單板式投影型顯示裝 置時，RGB中各顏色射入像素區域的角度不同。因而， RGB各顏色自顯示面板射出，於圖像移動元件内，射入雙 折射元件的光線角度也不同。雙折射元件具有自光射入面 傾斜的光學軸，垂直射入光射入面的光線在與包含光學軸 及射入光軸之平面（主剖面）平行的方向移動。此時，圖像 移動方向與雙折射元件的主剖面平行。但是，RGB各顏色 對雙折射元件之射入面的射入角度不同時，光線移動方向 或移動量即改變。 首先，考慮RGB之色分離方向與圖像移動方向一致時。 此時，因RGB各顏色的光線平行射入雙折射元件的主剖 —-90- I紙張G適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(21G X 297公爱)1227338 A7 __B7 V. Description of the invention (87) (Mapping) On the frame memory circuit 1300, each sub-frame image is stored in the corresponding frame memory. ? The data of the sub-frame images that have been recalled in each frame memory are sequentially read out. As described above, when a frame is composed of two sub-frames, if the method of the first embodiment is adopted, since all the shell materials of each frame are stored regardless of the number of sub-frames contained in the frame, it is necessary to use each color signal. Total 3 frame memories. However, in this embodiment, since the sub-frame image is directly mapped to the frame memory, it is only necessary to store necessary sub-frame image data in the frame memory. Therefore, when one frame is composed of two sub-frames, there is an advantage that the number of frame memories or the memory capacity is two-thirds of the second embodiment. (Twenty-second embodiment) _ Next, an image moving element having at least a combination of a liquid crystal element and a birefringent element is taken as an example to describe a preferred moving direction of an image. When the single-plate projection display device using the micro lens array shown in FIG. 2 is used, the angles at which the colors in the RGB enter the pixel area are different. Therefore, each color of RGB is emitted from the display panel, and the angle of light rays entering the birefringent element in the image moving element is also different. The birefringent element has an inclined optical axis from the light incident surface, and light rays perpendicularly incident on the light incident surface move in a direction parallel to a plane (main section) including the optical axis and the incident optical axis. At this time, the image moving direction is parallel to the main section of the birefringent element. However, when the incident angle of each RGB color to the incident surface of the birefringent element is different, the direction or amount of light movement changes. First, consider when the RGB color separation direction is consistent with the image movement direction. At this time, the main section of the birefringent element is caused by the rays of each color of RGB in parallel. —-90- I Paper G applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21G X 297 public love)

Claims (1)

T9 9^4591號專利申請案 1ΖΖ 專利範圍替換本(93年4月） Α8 Β8 C8 D8 申請專利範圍 ΠΗ „---------- —1 年月a 補充 1· 一種投影型圖像顯示裝置，其具備： 光源； 圖像顯示面板，其具有可分別調變光線的數個像 域； ’、 光控制手段，其係因應波段，使自上述光源射出之光 線在^述數個像素區域中之對應像素區域上聚光；及 光學系統，其係藉由上述圖像顯示面板所調變的光線 在被投影面上形成圖像， 且具備： 分時顯示電路，其係自構成上述圖像之各鴨圖像資料 生成數個子㈣像資料，以上述圖像顯示面板分時顯示 上述數個子幀圖像；及 、、圖像移動元件，其係使上述圖像顯示面板所顯示之上 达數個子幀圖像中選出之子幀圖像在上述被投影面上 動， -以屬於被上述圖像顯示面板之不同圖像區域調變之不 同波段的光線依序照射上述被投影面上的同一區域， 、^述光控制手段係因應波長帶域，使自上述光源射出 之光線朝向同一面内所包含之相異方向， 上述圖像移動元件係使上述子幀圖像在與上述面平行 的方向上移動。 2· —種投影型圖像顯示裝置，其具備·· 光源； 圖像顯示面板，其具有可分別調變光線的數個像素區 本紙張尺細中 丨一 1 -|T9 9 ^ 4591 Patent Application 1ZZ Replacement of Patent Scope (April, 1993) Α8 Β8 C8 D8 Scope of Patent Application ΠΗ „---------- — 1 year a Supplement 1 · A projection type drawing An image display device includes: a light source; an image display panel having a plurality of image domains that can respectively modulate light; and a light control means that responds to a wavelength band so that the light emitted from the light source is described in several Condensing light on the corresponding pixel region in the pixel region; and an optical system that forms an image on the projection surface by the light modulated by the image display panel, and includes: a time-sharing display circuit, which is self-constructed Each duck image data of the image generates a plurality of child image data, and displays the plurality of sub-frame images in a time-sharing manner by the image display panel; and, an image moving element that causes the image display panel to display The sub-frame image selected from the above several sub-frame images moves on the projected surface, and-sequentially irradiates the projected surface with light belonging to different wavelength bands modulated by different image regions of the image display panel. on In the same area, the light control means corresponds to the wavelength band to direct the light emitted from the light source to different directions contained in the same plane, and the image moving element makes the sub-frame image parallel to the plane. 2 · —A projection-type image display device provided with a light source; an image display panel having a plurality of pixel regions capable of respectively modulating light The paper ruler is a small one 丨 1-| 1227338 六、申請專利範園 域； 光&amp;制手奴，其係因應波段，使自上述光源射出之光 線在土述數個像素區域中之對應像素區域上聚光，·及 光學系統，其係藉由上述圖像顯示面板所調變的光線 在被投影面上形成圖像， 且具備： 分時顯示電路，其係自構成上述圖像之各幢圖像資料 生成數個子悄圖像資料，以上述圖像顯示面板分時顯示 上述數個子幀圖像；及 、圖像私動7C件，其係使上述圖像顯示面板所顯示之上 述數個子1^貞圖傻φ ;强山&gt; -2^ » μ _ 篆中k出之子幀圖像在上述被投影面上移 動， 、屬方、被上述圖像顯示面板之不同圖像區域調變之不 同波段的光線依序照射上述被投影面上的同—區域， 上述圖像移動元件所致使之上述子幀圖像的移動方 向，係與上述圖像顯示面板之顯示畫面的短邊方向一 致。 3· —種投影型圖像顯示裝置，其具備： 光源； 圖像&quot;員不面板，其具有可分別調變光線的數個像素區 域； 光控制手段，其係因應波段，使自上述光源射出之光 線在^述數個像素區域中之對應像素區域上聚光；及 光子系、、先，其係藉由上述圖像顯示面板所調變的光線 -2- 1227338 A8 B8 C8 D8 93· U 3修正 年月曰1227338 VI. Patent application domain; Light &amp; Hand Slavery, which responds to the wave band and focuses the light emitted from the light source on the corresponding pixel area of the several pixel areas of the earth, and the optical system, which It forms an image on the surface to be projected by the light modulated by the image display panel, and is provided with: a time-sharing display circuit that generates a plurality of sub-image data from the image data of each building constituting the image , The above-mentioned sub-frame images are displayed in a time-sharing manner by the above-mentioned image display panel; and, the image private 7C piece is used to make the above-mentioned several sub-frames displayed on the above-mentioned image display panel 1 ^ 贞 图 傻; ; -2 ^ »μ _ 子 The sub-frame image out of k is moved on the projected surface, and the light of different wavelengths modulated by different image regions of the image display panel is sequentially illuminated on the subject. In the same area on the projection surface, the moving direction of the sub-frame image caused by the image moving element is consistent with the short-side direction of the display screen of the image display panel. 3. A projection-type image display device including: a light source; an image panel, which has a plurality of pixel regions that can respectively modulate light; and a light control method, which responds to the wave band and uses the light source The emitted light is condensed on the corresponding pixel area among the above-mentioned several pixel areas; and the photon system, first, it is the light modulated by the above-mentioned image display panel -2- 1227338 A8 B8 C8 D8 93 · U 3 amended date 六、申請專利範圍 在被投影面上形成圖像 且具備·· 分時頭不電路，其係自構成上述圖像之各幀圖像資料 生成數個子幀圖像資料，以上述圖像顯示面板分時顯示 上述數個子幀圖像；及 圖像移動元件，其係使上述圖像顯示面板所顯示之上 述數個子幀圖像中選出之子幀圖像在上述被投影面上移 動， 以屬於被上述圖像顯示面板之不同圖像區域調變之不 同波段的光線依序照射上述被投影面上的同一區域， 在上述被投影面上移動的上述子幀圖像的移動模式具 有週期性， 上述移動模式係包含使上述子幀圖像往同一直線上之 4個以上的相異的位置移動。 4.如申請專利範圍第丨項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中上述 被投影面上移動的上述子幢圖像的移動模式具有週期 上述移動模式係包含使上述子悄圖像往同一直線上之伟 以上的相異的位置移動。 5. 如申請專利範圍第卜2、3項中任_項之投影型圖像顧示 =面Γί述子幢顯示的切換係藉由上述圖像顯示面 板的面寫入來進行，且使上述圖傻-與上述切換同步執行。U像…件之移動操作 6. 如申請專利範圍第卜2、3項中任—項之投影型圖像顯示 -3- 1227338 A8 C8 申請專利範圍 D8 於l3修止 年月曰、4、&gt; 補)^ 裝置，其中上述子幀顯示的切換係藉由上述圖像顯示面 板的線掃瞄來進行，且使上述圖像移動元件之移動操作 與上述切換同步執行。 如申請專利範圍第6項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中上 述被投影面之上述子幀的移動方向與上述圖像顯示面板 的掃瞄方向相同。 8·如申請專利範圍第6項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中上 述被投影面之上述子幀的移動方向與上述圖像顯示面板 的掃瞒方向不一致。 9·如申請專利範圍第6項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中上 逑被投影面上，上述子幀圖像之顯示區域的增加速度與 上述圖像移動元件之移動區域的增加速度一致。 10.如申請專利範圍第6項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中上 述像素區域的各列，可改變開始掃瞄與上述圖像移動元 件開始光程移動之間的時間間隔。 11 ·如申請專利範圍第6項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中上 述像素區域的各列，預先設定有開始掃瞄與上述圖像移 動元件開始光程移動之間的時間間隔。 12·如申請專利範圍第11項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中上 述像素區域的各列，使上述圖像移動元件開始光程移動 比開始掃瞄延後執行。 13·如申請專利範圍第1、2、3項中任一項之投影型圖像顯示 裝置’其中使構成第n+1 (11為正整數）幀圖像之子幀圖像 在上述被投影面上移動的方向，與使構成第η幀圖像之6. Scope of patent application: Forming an image on the projected surface and equipped with a time-division head circuit, which generates several sub-frame image data from the image data of each frame constituting the above image, and displays the panel with the above image Displaying the plurality of sub-frame images in a time-division manner; and an image moving element that moves a sub-frame image selected from the plurality of sub-frame images displayed on the image display panel on the projected surface to belong to the The light of different wavebands modulated in different image regions of the image display panel sequentially irradiates the same region on the projected surface, and the movement pattern of the sub-frame image moving on the projected surface has a periodicity. The moving mode includes moving the sub-frame images to four or more different positions on the same straight line. 4. The projection-type image display device according to item 丨 of the application, wherein the movement pattern of the sub-frame image moving on the projected surface has a period. The movement pattern includes moving the sub-images on the same straight line. Disparate position moves above the Great. 5. If the projected image of any of the items 2 and 3 in the scope of the application for patents is displayed on the surface, the display of the sub-frames is switched by the surface writing of the image display panel, and the above Figure silly-executed synchronously with the above switch. U image… moving operations 6. If any of the scope of patent applications No. 2 and 3 is applied—the projected image display of the item -3- 1227338 A8 C8 The scope of patent application D8 is revised on the 13th, 4, & gt Supplement) ^ device, wherein the switching of the sub-frame display is performed by line scanning of the image display panel, and the movement operation of the image moving element is performed in synchronization with the switching. For example, the projection-type image display device according to item 6 of the patent application, wherein the moving direction of the sub-frame on the projection surface is the same as the scanning direction of the image display panel. 8. The projection type image display device according to item 6 of the patent application, wherein the moving direction of the sub-frame on the projected surface does not coincide with the sweeping direction of the image display panel. 9. The projection type image display device according to item 6 of the patent application, wherein the increase speed of the display area of the sub-frame image is the same as the increase speed of the moving area of the image moving element. 10. The projection type image display device according to item 6 of the patent application, wherein the columns of the pixel area can change the time interval between the start of scanning and the start of the optical path movement of the image moving element. 11 · The projection type image display device according to item 6 of the patent application, wherein each column of the pixel area is preset with a time interval between the start of scanning and the start of optical path movement of the image moving element. 12. The projection-type image display device according to item 11 of the scope of patent application, wherein each column of the pixel region causes the image moving element to start the optical path shift later than the start of scanning. 13. The projection-type image display device according to any one of claims 1, 2, and 3, wherein the sub-frame images constituting the (n + 1) th (11 is a positive integer) frame image are on the projected surface. The direction of the upward movement is the same as that of the n-th frame. 本紙張尺度適财關家鮮(CNS) Α4規格( χ 1227338 A8 B8 C8 D8 心申請專利範® ~一~~Γ^ΤΤ^Ι—' 年”樣充 子幢圖像在上述被投影面1T?F的方7相同。 二申專利範圍第1、2、3項中任—項之投影型圖像顯示 衣置其中使構成第η+1 (η為正整數）幀圖像之子幀圖像 在上述被投影面上移動的方向，與使構成第η悄圖像之 子幀圖像在上述被投影面上移動的方向相反， 第η+1幀圖像第一個子幀圖像相對第11幀圖像之最後一 個子幀圖像不移動。 15·如申請專利範圍第1或2項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中 構成各幀圖像之子幀圖像的數量為2個，各子幀圖像在 上述被投影面上不同的兩個位置上依序顯示。 16.如申請專利範圍第j或2項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中 構成各幀圖像之子幀圖像的數量為2個，各子幀圖像在 上述被技影面上不同的三個位置上依序顯示，上述子幀 圖像之移動週期為幀期間的1 5倍。 17·如申請專利範圍第1或2項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中 構成各幀圖像之子幀圖像的數量為4個以上， 各子幅圖像在上述被投影面上不同的三個位置上依序 顯示， 構成各幀圖像之4個以上子幀圖像中，至少2個子幀圖 像顯示在上述被投影面上的同一位置。 18.如申請專利範圍第9項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中顯 示在上述被投影面上同一位置之上述至少2個子幀圖像 包含頭不黑色的子巾貞圖像。 19·如申請專利範圍第9項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中顯 -5- |„l„ I I II …緣“.,… I III, ||, ^ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公箸) &quot;&quot;&quot; &quot; ....................... 11227338 申請專利範圍 A8 B8 C8 D8 ί Π j ^The paper size is suitable for wealth and family (CNS) Α4 specifications (χ 1227338 A8 B8 C8 D8 heart patent application patent ® ~ one ~ ~ Γ ^ ΤΤ ^ I—'years') A sample of the sub-block image on the projected surface 1T? F is the same as party 7. The projected image display device of any one of items 1, 2, and 3 of the scope of the second patent application includes the sub-frame images constituting the η + 1 (η is a positive integer) frame image in The moving direction on the projected surface is opposite to the moving direction of the sub-frame images constituting the n-th quiet image on the projected surface, and the first sub-frame image of the (n + 1) th frame image is relative to the 11th frame. The image of the last sub-frame of the image does not move. 15. If the projection type image display device of item 1 or 2 of the patent application scope, wherein the number of sub-frame images constituting each frame image is 2, each sub-frame The images are sequentially displayed at two different positions on the above-mentioned projected surface. 16. For example, the projection type image display device of the item j or 2 of the patent application scope, wherein the number of sub-frame images constituting each frame image is 2, each sub-frame image is sequentially displayed at three different positions on the subject surface, and the sub-frame image is shifted The moving period is 15 times as long as the frame period. 17. If the projection type image display device of item 1 or 2 of the patent application scope, wherein the number of sub-frame images constituting each frame image is 4 or more, each sub-frame image The images are sequentially displayed at the three different positions on the projected surface, and at least two of the four or more subframe images constituting each frame image are displayed at the same position on the projected surface. The projected image display device according to item 9 of the scope of patent application, wherein the at least two sub-frame images displayed at the same position on the projected surface include sub-frame images with black heads. Projection type image display device in the range of item 9, in which -5- | „l„ II II… edge “.,… I III, ||, ^ This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X (297 gongs) &quot; &quot; &quot; &quot; ............. 11227338 Application for patent scope A8 B8 C8 D8 ί Π j ^ 示在上述被投影面上同-位置之上述至少2個子悄圖像 包含党度被減低的子幀圖像。 ==範園第^'3項中任一項之投影型圖像顯示 ;f上述被投影面上移動之上述子鴨的移動模 :具有週期性’上述移動模式的1週期至少包含兩次概 略兩個像素間距的移動。 21如申請專利H目第12項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，立中上 述子帕圖像i週期的移動模式係由以分別依序顯示之, 子幅圖像〈移動所規定之6種子集合中所選出的偶數個 子集合所組成， 上述6種子集合屬於移動方向處於對稱關係之兩群中的 任何一群。 22. 如申請專利範圍第21項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，並中上 :子幅圖们週期的移動模式交替包含分別自上述 ^出的子集合。 f 23. 如申請專利範圍第21項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，並中上 述子幢圖像i週期的移動模式由依序顯示之丨8個^幀 像的移動所構成， 並叉替包含分別自上述兩群選出之6個子集合。 24. 如申請專利範圍第21項之投影型圖像顯示…上 f子幢圖们週期的移動模式由依序顯示之6個子幢圖像 的移動所構成， 並包含自上述兩群分別逐一選出之2個子集合。 25·如申請專利範圍第2項之投影型圖像顯示，其中連 6 國國豕標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 裝 訂 # 1227338 六、申請專利範園 A8 B8 C8 D8 sa 4· is 修j：$ a 3诂吉 袖无 圖像間的移動；；會：上述被投影面 ^以和動万向測定之像素間距的概略2倍以上。 π.如申請專利範圍第2項 ，、足扠釤型圖像顯示裝置，其中上 逑子幀圖像1週期的孩1 i ,、 ,,,.. 夕動杈式由依序顯示之12個子幀圖 像構成， =續顯：之子_間的移動量，不會成為上述被投 〜上沿者上述移動方向測定之像素間距的概略2倍以 上。 27.如申凊專利範圍第2項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中上 述子悄圖像1週期的移動模式由依序顯示之6個子幢圖像 構成， 連續顯示之子_像間的移動量，不會成為上述被投影 面上沿著上述移動方向測定之像素間距的概略2倍以上。 28·:申請專利範圍^、2、3項中任一項之投影型圖像顯示 裝置，其中上述被投影面上之上述子幀的移動量，為上 述被投影面上沿著上述移動方向測定之像素間距的概略 整數倍。 29·如申凊專利範圍第丨、2、3項中任一項之投影型圖像顯示 裝置，其中以上述圖像顯示面板顯示之上述子幀圖像切 換成下一個子幀時，被上述圖像顯示面板調變之光線係 被阻断’以使其不達到上述被投影面上。 30.如申凊專利範圍第2項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中上 述光控制手段因應波段，將上述光源射出的光線朝向包 含於同一面内之不同方向， .. 們_ ....... _·ΙΙΝ 1 1 \·.·^··國_····ιι _.如^ — __ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規袼(210X 297公釐) 1227338 _ 申清專利範圍 A8 B8 C8 D8 车月曰士 補无 上述圖像移動元件在與上述面平行的方向移動上述子 幀圖像。 丁 31·如申請專利範園第3〇項之投影型圖像顯示裝置，其中上 述圖像移動元件移動上述子㈣像的移動方向，與上述 圖像頭π面板之顯示畫面的短邊方向一致。 32.種圖像_不裝置，其係具備具有分別可調變光線的數 個像素區域《圖像顯不面板，並藉由被上述圖像顯示面 板所調變的光線形成圖像者； 具備： 、分時顯示電路，其係自構成上述圖像之幅圖像資料生 成數個子幢圖像資料，以上述圖像顯示面板分時顯示上 述數個子幀圖像；及 圖像私動元件，其係使上述圖像顯示面板所顯示之上 述數個子鴨圖像中選出之子鴨圖像的光程移動， 一將屬於被上述圖像顯示面板之不同圖像區域調變之不 同波段的光線，藉由上述子幀的移動來合成， 上述=路具備：第-記憶區域，其係儲存構成上述幢 圖像〈第-種顏色的相關資料；第二記憶區域，其係儲 存構成上述幀圖像之第二種顏色的相關資料；及第三記 =域’其係儲存構成上述_像之第三種顏色的相關 藉由以預先設定之順序選擇性組合分別自上述第一記 憶區域、第二記憶區域及第三記憶區域讀出之資料，生 成上述數個子巾貞的各個資料， -8- ϋ用中國國家； 1227338 ~—_________六、申請專利範圍 A BCD 93: 年 JE、广 ^ΑΊ 上逑圖像移動元件係為如申請專利範圍第丨、2、3項 中任一項所記載之圖像移動元件。 種圖像&amp;員示衣置’其係具備具有可分別調變光線的數 個像素區域之圖像顯示面板，並藉由被上述圖像顯示面 板所調變的光線形成圖像者； 具備： 、刀時頒不包路，其係自構成上述圖像之幀圖像資料生 成數個子幀圖像資料，以上述圖像顯示面板分時顯示上 述數個子幀圖像；及 固象和動元件，其係使上述圖像顯示面板所顯示之上 述數個子幀圖像中選出之子幀圖像的光程移動； 一將屬於被上述圖像顯示面板之不同圖像區域調變之不 同波段的光線，藉由上述子幀的移動來合成， 。上逑電路具備記憶上述數個子幀圖像資料的數個記憶 區域， 上述數個記憶區域内記憶有資料，該資料包含··構成 μ t貞圖像之第—顏色相關資料、構成上述㈣像之第 二顏色相關資料及構成上述幀圖像之第三顏色相關資 料， 、 上述圖像移動元件係為如申請專利範圍第1、2、3項 中任一項所記載之圖像移動元件。 /、 34’種圖像顯示裝置’其係具備圖像顯示面板者，該圖像 :::板具有光調變部，該光調變部上週期性排列有屬 万；弟》皮段的第-顏色用像素區域、屬於第二波段的第 -9- I227338六、申請專利範圍 A8 B8 C8 SSSSaWf———W3 日 ίΐ補充 二波段之第三顏色用像素 一顏色用像素區域、及屬於第 區域； 還具備圖像移動元件，可使被上述光調變部調變之光 線的光程週期性移動， 斤橫切上述光程之某假想面上的第一像素顏色，係由在 第一期間被上述第一顏色用像素區域調變之光線、在第 一期間被上述第二顏色用像素區域調變之光線、及在第 三期間被上述第三顏色用像素區域調變之光線所定義， 上述假想面上之與上述第一像素鄰接之第二像素的顏 色，係由在上述第一期間被上述第二顏色用像素區域調 變的光線、在上述第二期間被上述第三顏色用像素區域 調變的光線、及在上述第三期間被上述第一顏色用像素 區域調變的光線所定義， 上述假想面上之與上述第二像素鄰接之第三像素的顏 色，係由在上述第一期間被上述第三顏色用像素區域調 k的光線、在上述第二期間被上述第一顏色用像素區域 調變的光線、及在上述第三期間被上述第二顏色用像素 區域調變的光線所定義， 上述圖像移動元件係為如申請專利範圍第1、2、3项 中任一項所記載之圖像移動元件。 35. —種圖像移動元件，其係使被圖像顯示面板調變之予幀 圖像的光程作週期性移動，藉此，可將上述子幀圖像選 擇性的轉向至某個面内同一直線上之距離一個像素間距 以上之三個以上的位置上者； i紙張尺度適财關家標準(CNS) A4規格 10- A8 B8 C8 D8The at least two sub-images shown at the same position on the projected surface include sub-frame images with reduced partyness. == Fan Yuan's projective image display according to any of ^ '3 items; f the above mentioned moving mode of the ducklings on the projected surface: a cycle with the periodicity' the above mentioned movement mode contains at least two outlines Move between two pixels. 21 If the projection type image display device according to item 12 of the H patent application is applied, the movement mode of the i-period of the sub-pattern image is displayed sequentially in order, the sub-frame images <the 6 seed sets specified by the movement It is composed of an even number of sub-sets selected in the above, and the above 6 seed sets belong to any one of the two groups whose moving directions are in a symmetrical relationship. 22. For example, the projection type image display device of the scope of application for the patent No. 21, and the middle and upper: the sub-frames of the periodic movement pattern alternately include the sub-sets from the above. f 23. For example, the projection type image display device of the scope of application for patent No. 21, and the movement pattern of the i-period of the sub-frame image is composed of the movement of 8 ^ frame images displayed in sequence, and the division includes Six sub-sets selected from the above two groups. 24. For example, the projected image display of the scope of patent application No. 21 ... The movement pattern of the sub-figure graphs on the cycle consists of the movement of the six sub-figure images displayed in sequence, and includes the one selected from the above two groups one by one. 2 sub-collections. 25. If the projection type image display of item 2 of the scope of patent application, including 6 countries ’national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) binding # 1227338 VI. Patent application park A8 B8 C8 D8 sa 4 · Is repair j: $ a 3 诂 Sleeveless movement between images; Will: The pixel pitch measured by the above-mentioned projected surface ^ by the motion universal is more than 2 times. π. As the second item in the scope of patent application, a foot-fork-type image display device, in which the children of the sub frame image 1 cycle 1 i,, ,,,... are displayed in sequence by the 12 children Frame image structure, = continuous display: The amount of movement between the child and the child will not be more than twice the approximate pixel pitch measured by the above-mentioned projected ~ upper along the moving direction. 27. The projection-type image display device according to item 2 of the patent claim, wherein the one-period movement pattern of the sub-images is composed of six sub-frame images displayed in sequence, and the amount of movement between the children and the images displayed continuously, It will not be more than twice the approximate pixel pitch measured along the moving direction on the projected surface. 28 ·: The projection type image display device according to any one of the scope of patent application ^, 2, 3, wherein the amount of movement of the sub-frame on the surface to be projected is measured along the direction of movement on the surface to be projected An integer multiple of the pixel pitch. 29. The projection type image display device according to any one of claims 1, 2, and 3 in the patent application range, wherein when the sub-frame image displayed on the image display panel is switched to the next sub-frame, it is The light modulated by the image display panel is blocked so that it does not reach the above-mentioned projected surface. 30. The projection-type image display device according to item 2 of the claim, wherein the above-mentioned light control means directs the light emitted by the above-mentioned light source to different directions included in the same plane in accordance with the wave band, .... we _ .... ... _ · ΙΙΝ 1 1 \ ·. · ^ ·· Country_ ···· ιι _.such as ^ — __ This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Regulation (210X 297 mm) 1227338 _ Application The scope of Qing patent A8 B8 C8 D8 Cheyue Shibu does not have the image moving element to move the sub-frame image in a direction parallel to the surface. Ding 31. The projection type image display device according to item 30 of the patent application park, wherein the moving direction of the image moving element to move the sub-image is consistent with the short-side direction of the display screen of the image head π panel. . 32. An image display device having a plurality of pixel regions, each of which has an adjustable light intensity, an image display panel, and an image formed by the light modulated by the image display panel; : A time-sharing display circuit, which generates a plurality of sub-frame image data from the image data constituting the above-mentioned image, and displays the above-mentioned sub-frame images in a time-sharing manner by the above-mentioned image display panel; and an image private moving element, It is to move the optical path of the child duck image selected from the plurality of child duck images displayed on the image display panel, and it will first belong to light rays of different wavelengths modulated by different image regions of the image display panel. Synthesized by the movement of the above-mentioned sub-frames, the above-mentioned = path is provided with: a -memory region, which stores relevant data constituting the above-mentioned building image <-the first color; a second memory region, which stores and constitutes the above-mentioned frame image Related information of the second color; and the third record = domain ', which stores the correlation of the third color that constitutes the above-mentioned image, by selectively combining the first memory area, The data read from the second memory area and the third memory area generate each of the above-mentioned several sub-frames, -8- using the Chinese country; 1227338 ~ ——_________ VI. Patent application scope A BCD 93: Year JE, Guang ^ ΑΊ The upper image moving element is an image moving element as described in any one of the scope of patent application Nos. 1, 2, and 3. This kind of image &amp; display device is provided with an image display panel having a plurality of pixel regions capable of modulating light, and an image is formed by the light modulated by the image display panel; : The knife-time award does not contain any trouble. It generates several sub-frame image data from the frame image data constituting the above image, and displays the above-mentioned several sub-frame images in a time-sharing manner by the image display panel; and fixed image and motion An element that moves the optical path of a selected sub-frame image selected from among the several sub-frame images displayed on the image display panel; one that will belong to different bands modulated by different image regions of the image display panel The light is synthesized by the movement of the above sub-frames. The upper circuit is provided with a plurality of memory regions for storing the image data of the plurality of sub-frames, and the data is stored in the plurality of memory regions. The data includes the first-color-related data constituting the μtzhen image and the image. The second color-related material and the third color-related material constituting the frame image, and the image moving element are the image moving elements described in any one of items 1, 2, and 3 of the scope of patent application. /, 34 types of image display devices, which are provided with an image display panel. The image ::: board has a light modulation section, and the light modulation section is periodically arranged with a million; The first-color pixel area, which belongs to the second wave band-9- I227338 VI. The scope of the patent application A8 B8 C8 SSSSaWf — W3 Day 2 Supplement the second color band of the third color pixel-color pixel area, and belong to the first Area; also equipped with an image moving element, which can periodically move the optical path of the light modulated by the light modulation section, and the first pixel color which crosses the imaginary plane of the optical path is determined by the first The light rays modulated by the pixel region for the first color during the period, the light rays modulated by the pixel region for the second color during the first period, and the light rays modulated by the pixel region for the third color during the third period. The color of the second pixel adjacent to the first pixel on the imaginary plane is light modulated by the second color pixel region during the first period, and is used by the third color during the second period. Pixel area The modulated light and the light modulated by the first color pixel region during the third period are defined. The color of the third pixel adjacent to the second pixel on the imaginary plane is determined by the first pixel. Light rays modulated by the third color pixel region during the period, light rays modulated by the first color pixel region during the second period, and light rays modulated by the second color pixel region during the third period By definition, the image moving element is an image moving element as described in any one of claims 1, 2, and 3 of the scope of patent application. 35. An image moving element that periodically moves the optical path of a pre-frame image modulated by an image display panel, thereby selectively turning the above-mentioned sub-frame image to a certain surface The distance on the same straight line is more than one pixel distance from three or more positions; i paper size suitable for financial standards (CNS) A4 specifications 10- A8 B8 C8 D8 1227338 六、申請專利範圍 具有： 第一元件，其係調變被上述圖像顯示面板調變之 圖像的偏光方向；及第二元件，其係因光 而 折射率不同， D @ 至少有兩組上述第一元件及第二元件，以串聯排列方 式配置在上述光程上， 使上述子幢圖像移動至上述三個以上位置中鄰接的位 置時，對配置於光線入射側之第一元件之電壓施加狀態 的選擇，視接著使上述子幀圖像移動的方向而定。 36. —種圖像移動元件，其係使被圖像顯示面板調變之子幀 圖像的光程作週期性移動，藉此，可將上述子幢圖像選 擇性的轉向至某個面内同一直線上之距離一個像素間距 以上之三個以上的位置上者； 具有： 第一元件，其係調變被上述圖像顯示面板調變之子幀 圖像的偏光方向；及第二元件，其係因光的偏光方向而 折射率不同， 土 有兩組上述第一元件及第二元件，以串聯排列方 式配置在上述光程上， 使上述子幀圖像移動至上述三個以上位置中之中央部 位置上時，對配置於光線入射侧之第一元件之電壓施加 狀怨’與對配置於光線射出侧之第一元件的電壓施加狀 態相同。 37.種圖像移動元件’其係使由圖像顯示面板調變之子中貞 11 - 丄， ~ …『丨丨丨丨 ~ I I «III ·ΙΙ Ι·ΙΙ I III I II I &quot; I _ _ ................... &quot; __ 尽紙Hit财標準(GNS) A4規格 1227338 申請專利範園1227338 6. The scope of the patent application includes: a first element that modulates the polarization direction of the image modulated by the image display panel; and a second element that has a different refractive index due to light. D @ has at least two When the first element and the second element are arranged in a series arrangement on the optical path, and when the sub-block image is moved to an adjacent position among the three or more positions, the first element disposed on the light incident side is aligned. The selection of the voltage application state depends on the direction in which the sub-frame image is moved next. 36. An image moving element that periodically moves the optical path of a sub-frame image modulated by an image display panel, thereby selectively turning the sub-frame image into a certain plane One on the same straight line at three or more positions above one pixel pitch; having: a first element that modulates the polarization direction of a sub-frame image modulated by the image display panel; and a second element that The refractive index is different due to the polarization direction of the light. There are two sets of the above-mentioned first element and second element, which are arranged in series on the optical path to move the sub-frame image to one of the three or more positions. When the central portion is in the position, the voltage applied to the first element disposed on the light incident side is the same as the voltage applied to the first element disposed on the light emitting side. 37. Kind of image moving element 'It is a son of a daughter who is adjusted by an image display panel. _ ......... &quot; __ Hit paper standard (GNS) A4 specification 1227338 Patent application park 像的光程作週期性移動，藉此，可將上述予鴨 性的轉向至某個面内同一畫埯 、一 叫n u 罝琛上·^距離一個像素間 上之三個以上的位置上者 圖 具備配置在上述光程上的第一圖像移動部分及第 像移動部分， 上述第一及第二圖像移動部分，分別具有··第—元 件：其係調變被上述圖像顯示面板調變之子幀圖像的： Y方向，及第一元件，其係因光的偏光方向而折射率不 因上述第一圖像移動元件造成子幀圖像的移動量，與 因上逑第二圖像移動元件造成子幀圖像的移動量彼此 同。 38.如申請專利範圍第37項之圖像移動元件，其中上述光程 上位於光線先入射侧之上述圖像移動部分之子幀圖像 的私動里係為，上述光程上，位於光線後入射側之上述 圖像移動部分之子幀圖像之移動量的2倍。 39·如申請專利範圍第37或38項之圖像移動元件，其中驅動 上述數個元件之施加電壓的組成，並非同時包含自〇^至 OFF之轉移與自〇叩至on之轉移。 40·—種圖像移動元件，其係使被圖像顯示面板調變之子幀 圖像的光程作週期性移動，藉此，可將上述子幀圖像選 擇性的轉向至某個面内同一直線上之距離一個像素間距 以上之數個位置上者； 具有： -12- I I I I ΙΙΙ·Ι··Ι I Μ ! ΊΙ·ηΐΙΙΓ1Ι Ι·Ι Ί III...... ... ， V -, ^^^^^ΓΠΓΓπ·Ι|Ι·ι........ ..... .....................'MKU.'U·, · 尽紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(〇尼）A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1227338The optical path of the image is periodically moved, so that the above-mentioned pre-duck can be turned to the same painting in a certain plane, one called nu 罝 上, and ^ three or more positions away from one pixel. The figure includes a first image moving portion and a first image moving portion arranged on the optical path, and the first and second image moving portions each have a first element: the modulation is controlled by the image display panel. Modulation of the sub-frame image: Y direction, and the first element whose refractive index is not caused by the polarization direction of light due to the movement of the sub-frame image due to the first image moving element, and the second element due to the second The image moving elements cause the amounts of movement of the sub-frame images to be the same as each other. 38. The image moving element according to item 37 of the scope of patent application, wherein the private movement of the sub-frame image of the image moving part on the optical path firstly incident on the light path is as follows: The moving amount of the sub-frame image of the image moving part on the incident side is twice. 39. If the image moving element according to item 37 or 38 of the scope of patent application, the composition of the applied voltage that drives the above-mentioned several elements does not include both the transition from 0 ^ to OFF and the transition from 0 叩 to on. 40 · —An image moving element that periodically moves the optical path of a sub-frame image modulated by an image display panel, thereby selectively turning the above-mentioned sub-frame image into a certain plane The distance on the same straight line is at a number of positions above one pixel pitch; having: -12- IIII ΙΙΙΙΙΙΙΙΙΜ! -, ^^^^^ ΓΠΓΓπ · Ι | Ι · ι ............................................. 'MKU .'U ·, · Applicable to Chinese national standard (〇 尼) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) as far as possible paper size 1227338 1227338 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 補充 透率特性、綠色光之電壓穿透率特性、及藍色光之電賡 穿透率特性被最適化的偏置值。 46·—種圖像移動元件，其係使被圖像顯示面板調變之子禎 圖像的光程作週期性移動，藉此，可將上述子幀圖像選 擇性的轉向至某個面内同一直線上之距離一個像素間距 以上之數個位置上者； 具有： 第一元件，其係調變被上述圖像顯示面板調變之子幀 圖像的偏光方向；及第二元件，其係因光的偏光方向而 折射率不同， 上述第一元件具有第一偏光調變元件及第二偏光調變 元件，且上述第二元件具有第一雙折射元件及第二雙折 射元件， 上逑第一偏光調變元件射出對上述第一雙折射元件的 正常光或異常光， 上述第二偏光調變元件射出對上述第二雙折射元件的 正常光或異常光， ^述第一雙折射元件使對包含上述光程某個基準面在 ㊀方向的上述圖像僅移動距離a， 上述第二雙折射元件使對上述基準面在0，。方向的上 述圖像僅移動距離b， tan 0 = a/b的關係成立。 Ο.如申請專利範圍第46項之圖像移動元件，其中⑴。 + 90°的關係成立。1227338 C8 D8 6. Scope of Patent Application Supplement The bias value of transmission characteristics, voltage transmission characteristics of green light, and electrical transmission characteristics of blue light are optimized. 46 · —An image moving element that periodically moves the optical path of a child image that is modulated by an image display panel, thereby selectively turning the above-mentioned sub-frame image into a certain plane Those on the same straight line are located at a number of positions above one pixel pitch; having: a first element that modulates the polarization direction of the sub-frame image modulated by the image display panel; and a second element that causes The polarization direction of light is different from the refractive index. The first element has a first polarization modulation element and a second polarization modulation element, and the second element has a first birefringence element and a second birefringence element. The polarized light modulating element emits normal or abnormal light to the first birefringent element, the second polarized light modulating element emits normal or abnormal light to the second birefringent element, and the first birefringent element makes The image including a reference plane of the optical path in the ㊀ direction is moved only by a distance a, and the second birefringent element is set to 0 ° with respect to the reference plane. The above image in the direction only moves by a distance b, and the relationship of tan 0 = a / b holds. 〇. The image moving element according to item 46 of the patent application, wherein ⑴. + 90 ° relationship holds. 豕標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 29^^^7 1227338 六、申請專利範圍 93. β 13 修‘ 年Dll曰十 …… 南无 48·如申請專利範圍第46項之圖像移動元件，其中0，。二『 的關係成立。 49·如申請專利範圍第47或48項之圖像移動元件，其中上述 0 為 45。。 50· —種圖像移動元件，其係使被圖像顯示面板調變之子幀 圖像的光程作週期性移動，藉此，可將上述子幀圖像選 擇性的轉向至某個面内同一直線上之距離一個像素間距 以上之三個以上的位置上者； 具有： 液晶層，其係顯示對偏光光線之兩個以上不同的折射 率；及 兩機基板，其係夾住上述液晶層， 上述兩塊基板之任何一塊基板的液晶侧表面上形成有 微小棱鏡或繞射光栅。 51·如申請專利範圍第5〇項之圖像移動元件，其中上述微小 稜鏡或繞射光栅由具有與上述兩個以上折射率中至少一 個折射率實質上相等之折射率的材料所構成。 52·如申請專利範圍第5〇項之圖像移動元件，其中具有至少 兩組上述硬晶層及上述兩塊基板，上述組被串聯排列在 上述光程上， 使上述子_幀圖像移動至上述三個以上位置中之鄰接位 =時，僅藉由對配置於光線射出側之圖像移動元件選擇 電壓施加，使上述子幀圖像移動。 53·—種圖像移動元件，其係具備成串聯排列在光程上的至 本紙^ -15- 1227338 六、申請專利範圍 A8 B8 C8 D8豕 Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 29 ^^^ 7 1227338 VI. Application for patent scope 93. β 13 Revision 'year Dll said ten ... Nan Wu 48 · If the patent application scope of the 46th image moving element, which The relationship of 0,. 2 "is established. 49. For example, the image moving element of the 47th or 48th scope of the application for a patent, wherein the above 0 is 45. 50. A type of image moving element, which is an image display panel. The optical path of the modulated sub-frame image is periodically moved, whereby the above-mentioned sub-frame image can be selectively turned to a position on the same straight line in a plane at a distance of more than one pixel from three pixels ; Having: a liquid crystal layer, which shows two or more different refractive indices for polarized light; and two-machine substrates, which sandwich the liquid crystal layer, and microscopically formed on the liquid crystal side surface of any of the two substrates Prism or diffraction grating. 51. The image moving element according to item 50 of the patent application, wherein the micro chirp or diffraction grating has a refractive index substantially equal to at least one of the two or more refractive indices. 52. The image moving element according to item 50 of the patent application scope, which has at least two groups of the hard crystal layer and the two substrates, and the groups are arranged in series on the optical path to make the above When the sub-frame image is moved to the adjacent bit of the above three or more positions, the sub-frame image is moved only by applying a voltage to the image moving element arranged on the light exit side. 53 · —Species Like a moving element, it is equipped with papers arranged in series on the optical path ^ -15-1227338 VI. Patent application scope A8 B8 C8 D8 犯4· I3修正 年月曰Criminal 4. I3 amendment 少兩組圖像移動元件 各組圖像移動元件分別包含兩個位移元件， 口位私元件具有對偏光光線顯示兩個以上不同折射率 的液晶層、及夾住上述液晶層的兩塊基板，上述兩塊基 板4任何-塊基板的液晶端表面上形成有微小棱鏡或繞 射光柵， 、，形成在同-組内所含之基板上之上述微小稜鏡或繞射 光拇的折射角彼此相等， 上返光私Ji开&gt; %在位#光線先入射侧纟—組所含基 板上之上述微小稜鏡或繞射光柵所形成的折射角為，在 上述光程上位於光線後入射侧之一組基板上之上述微小 棱鏡或繞射光栅所形成之折射角的2倍。 54,種圖像移動元件’其#、具備成串聯排列在光程上的至 少兩組圖像移動元件， 各組圖像移動元件分別包含兩個位移元件， 各位移元件具有對偏光光線顯示兩個以上丨同折射率 的液晶層、及夾住上述液晶層的兩塊基板，上述兩塊基 板之任何-塊基板的液晶側表面上形成有微小稜鏡或繞 射光栅， 形成在同-組内所含之基板上之上述微小棱鏡或繞射 光柵的折射角彼此相等， 上述光程上，位於光線先入射側之—組所含基板的距 離為，在上述光程上位於光線後入射側之一組基板之距 離的2倍。 55·—種圖像移動元件，其係使被圖像顯示面板調變之子幀 本紙張尺度適用中國國=家標準(CNS) A4規格 -16- 1227338 as B8There are at least two sets of image moving elements. Each set of image moving elements includes two displacement elements. The oral personal element has two or more liquid crystal layers with different refractive indices for polarized light, and two substrates sandwiching the liquid crystal layer. On the liquid crystal end surfaces of any of the two substrates 4, micro prisms or diffraction gratings are formed on the liquid crystal end surfaces of the two substrates. The refractive angles of the micro chirps or diffracted light rays formed on the substrates included in the same group are equal to each other. The upper back light private Ji Kai &gt;% 在位 #ray first incident side 纟 —the refraction angle formed by the above-mentioned small chirp or diffraction grating on the substrate included in the group is on the incident side of the light on the above optical path The refraction angle formed by the above-mentioned tiny prisms or diffraction gratings on a group of substrates is twice. 54 types of image moving elements, which are provided with at least two sets of image moving elements arranged in series on the optical path. Each group of image moving elements includes two displacement elements, and each displacement element has two displays for polarized light. More than one liquid crystal layer with the same refractive index, and two substrates sandwiching the liquid crystal layer, and any chirped or diffractive grating is formed on the liquid crystal side surface of any of the two substrates and formed in the same group The refraction angles of the above-mentioned micro prisms or diffraction gratings on the substrate contained therein are equal to each other. On the optical path, the distance between the substrates on the first incident side of the group and the included substrate is on the rear incident side on the optical path. Two times the distance of a group of substrates. 55 · —An image moving element, which is a sub-frame that is adjusted by the image display panel. This paper size is applicable to China Standards (CNS) A4 specifications -16- 1227338 as B8 圖像的光程作週期性移動， 擇性的轉向至某個面内同一 以上之四個位置上者； 藉此，可將上述子幀圖像選 直線上之距離一個像素間距 一移動元件及第二 在上述光程上具有串聯排列成的第 移動元件， Μ系設 量的2 、上述第—移動元件所造成之子幅圖像的移 疋為上述第r移動元件所造成之子里 择。 Η IX移動 -17-The optical path of the image is periodically moved, and selectively turned to one of the above four positions in a certain plane; thereby, the above-mentioned sub-frame image can be selected by a distance of one pixel space on a straight line and a moving element and Secondly, there are second moving elements arranged in series on the optical path, and M is a set amount of 2. The shift of the sub-image caused by the first moving element is selected by the sub-element caused by the r-th moving element. Η IX Mobile -17- ί , , I __ ΙΙΜ π ’ΙΜ _ —Έ I ||·||_— ι_ I 11 in ι 11 , .........ΜΙ .1. ϋ.·,」 nir - 本紙ί艮尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4規格(210 χ 297公釐)ί, I __ ΙΙΜ π 'ΙΜ _ —Έ I || · || _— ι_ I 11 in ι 11, ......... ΜΙ .1. ϋ. ·, ”nir-paper Standards apply to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 x 297 mm)